31B-193 (8) Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College .,
Northampton, MA
D. Preparation
1. At all fire rated assemblies,prepare all penetrations for pipes.
E. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size, leaving no voids. Compress and
friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing
compound. am
3.7 TESTING
A. Balancing Loads:
I. Circuits shall be connected to the panelboards so that the total load is distributed
equally between each line and neutral to within ten percent. Branch circuits shall be
balanced on their own panelboards, and feeder loads balanced on the main
distribution panel. Reasonable load testing shall be arranged for verification if
requested by the Public Works Department. + !
END OF SECTION
W
MW
W
WW
MW
ELECTRICAL 16100-20
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
Architect. Switch outlets shall be 48"above finished floor,unless aligned above or below closest
block course. The Electrical Contractor shall check with the Architectural and Structural Plans
for interferences.
B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the
threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket.
C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein without
excessive bending of the conductors,which would damage the conductor insulation.
D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1/4" back of
NO
finished surface.
E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to
support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture.
on
F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used,shall be provided with covers.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufacturer's printed installation instructions,whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and
all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Electrical
Contractor and be included in his bid.
3.6 FIRE SAFING
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work
including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers.
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway
walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine
rooms, outdoor storage rooms,and receiving rooms.
B. Safing Insulation
1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors,
Inc., or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full
length and width,or as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
" C. Seal Compound: At " "
p poke-through openings, apply Firecode seal compound as
manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc.,or approved equal,over Thermafiber fire safing.
ELECTRICAL 16100-19
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ..�
Northampton, MA
accessible.
F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces,except as otherwise specified.
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of
electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in non-metallic raceways
and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. The ground connection shall be .�
made at the main service equipment.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding
and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and lighting systems installed under
this Contract.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and equipment ..
to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of connections. Provide and
install bonding and grounding conductors with approved termination where required,
conforming with the latest Massachusetts Electrical Code and other applicable specification
standards.
D. A#12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length of flexible ..
metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment
components for continuity. Positive ground connections with the ground wire shall be made at
each outlet box, lighting fixture, motor and other equipment components by means of
positively secured ground clamp in each.
3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more than
the equivalent of three 90° bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary, the
Electrical Contractor shall provide suitable pull boxes.
B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably protected
against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction. .••
C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to junction
boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on conduit 1-1/4" or
larger. Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections.
D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit to
eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with cable "1e
jumper across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ceiling
mounted lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures.
3.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18" above finished floor,
aligned above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall mounted equipment
precludes this mounting height. At such locations, receptacle height shall be as directed by the
ELECTRICAL 16100-18
MR
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
the real time photographs showing the Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR)
MR measurements of the individual cable segments.
d. Formalized As-built Drawings indicating the physical cable plant, component
and node locations.
me
e. A topology diagram depicting the network configuration for Owners reference
when additions, changes,or modifications are made to the original design.
go
2.11 EMERGENCY CALLFORAID SYSTEM(Handicap Toilet)
A. The building's Emergency Call-For-Aid System will be furnished and installed (including
cabling)by the Electrical Contractor.
B. Each Emergency Call Station shall consist of a single gang box with blank plate and a call
switch. Call switch shall be Simplex 5001 series.
C. The call station switch shall be long-life, positive acting mounted on a stainless steel plate
marked"Emergency". The unit shall include a six foot(6)long nylon pull cord.
D. The combination chime/light station shall be a single bulb dome lamp with soft chime tone;
flame retardant ABS panel with snap-in lens. Provide lamps, chime, and all required
transformers.
W E. Activation of system shall cause dome to illuminate and chime to tone. Signal cancellation
must be made at the point of origin.
4
PART 3-INSTALLATION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as to
cause no delay in the construction by other trades.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the
correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements
and those shown on plans.
C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Contractor finds that the work of other trades might
interfere with his,the Architect shall be notified.
D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of
feeders, mains,and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans. The
exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given to work
of other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire installation shall
�w
conform to the latest issue of the Massachusetts Electrical Code and local inspection authorities.
E. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, control, and apparatus, shall be made
ELECTRICAL 16100-17
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
..Q
Northampton, MA
for occupancy.
2. Make additional mechanical and electrical adjustments within the scope of the work
and which are deemed necessary by the Architect or Owner as a result of the
acceptance tests.
R. Testing and Inspection
1. Test and inspect all parts of the work provided under this Section and as required by
codes, standard or authorities having jurisdiction, and conduct all tests and inspections
to the complete satisfaction of the Architect and all authorities. Notify the Architect
and all involved authorities at least one(1)week prior to testing or inspection. Do not
cover work prior to testing or inspection.
2. The Contractor shall certify all twisted pair cable drops with a time domain
reflectometer (TDR) device in order to verify compliance with IEEE Specifications.
The test results for all cable drops must meet or exceed the following Specifications
when tested from each end.
aw
a. Compliance with EIA/TIA T569B wiring sequence.
b. Distance: Less than 90 meters. MW
C. Attenuation at 10.0 MHz: Less than 6.95 dB.
d. Near end crosstalk(NEXT)at 10.0 Mhz: Greater than 44.1)Db. am
e. Cable Resistance: Less than 9.4 OHMS(18.8 loopback).
4W
f. Noise: Less than 100 mv.
g. TDR testing will be performed with 10 ft. Category V patch cables; one at ..
TDR,and one at signal injector,
h. Document all data obtained in cable certification process for each drop, �.
including Outlet IO and Pass/Fail status.
S. System Documentation:
1. Prepare and submit four (4) copies of operation and maintenance manuals, neatly
bound as outlined in this Specification.
2. Manual to include:
a. A system block diagram with all input/output terminations and patch points
identified.
b. A listing of the As-built cabling and components installed.
C. A record of the dynamic test results,both data communication simulation and
ELECTRICAL 16100-16
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
3. Install work neatly, with boxes, equipment, etc., plumb and square. Adjust layout as
necessary to preserve symmetry and aesthetics. Install equipment to provide maximum
safety to future operators.
4. Clearly, logically, and permanently mark connectors, jacks, cables, and cable
terminations.
R Wiring
1. Provide wire, conduits, and raceways according to standard broadcast practices. Do not
exceed 30%fill in conduit.
2. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to cables and equipment.
3. Wiring shall not rest on ceiling material nor touch any heat sources. Conduits exposed
to physical abuse shall be run in RSC, 3/4"minimum.
4. Install all data wire and cable. Ensure proper. .
a. Pulling tensions.
b. Quantities.
C. Types.
d. Lengths.
e. Routing.
f. Wire group separation.
g•
Identification.
5. The interconnection of all equipment requiring shielded cable shall be by Belden type
9451,or equivalent,unless otherwise specified.
6. All wires shall be permanently identified at each wire end by marking with "E-Z" tape
markers or equivalent.
7. Splicing of cables is not permitted between terminations at specified equipment.
8. Form, in a neat and orderly manner, all conductors in enclosures and boxes,wireways
and wiring troughs, providing circuit and conductor identification. Tie as required
using T&B "Ty-Raps" of appropriate size and type. Limit spacing between ties to 6",
and provide circuit and conductor identification at least once in each enclosure.
9. Provide ample service loops at each termination so that plates, panels, and equipment
can be unmounted for service and inspection.
Q. Acceptance Testing
1. Acceptance testing shall be performed by the Architect/Engineer and Owner during a
period designated by the Owner. The period of time required for acceptance testing is
two (2)working days. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of one (1) technician for
the acceptance testing period. This area shall be completed with all furnishings ready
ELECTRICAL 16100-15
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
and shorted pairs shall be examined to determine if the problem is caused by faulty
termination. If the termination is proper, the bad pairs shall be tapped at both ends
and noted on the punch down sheets.
2. If any data cable contains any bad conductors or pairs,the entire cable shall be replaced
at no charge to the Owner.
3. All terminated UTP cables shall conform to the Specifications for Category 5 cable.
L. Grounding
1. All equipment racks, housings,and raceways shall be grounded.
2. Data system shall contain a single point ground. All cabinets, racks, etc. shall be
connected to a single point ground which, in turn,will be connected to the grounding
systems conductors in that area.
3. All manufacturers grounding requirements shall be adhered to as a minimum.
M. Labeling
1. Each cable shall be labeled: ,.
a. Where it enters a termination or patch panel.
b. On the front of the patch panel or punch block. .�
2. Cables shall be labeled using pre-printed or write-on markers with a clear overwrap to
protect the labeling. If pre-printed markers are utilized, the clear overwrap shall cover
the entire legend.
3. All cables will be labeled at both ends,with room number and floor.
N. Field Quality Control
1. Employ a Job Superintendent or Project Manager during the course of the installation
to provide co-ordination of the work of the Division and of other trades and to provide
technical information when requested by other trades. This person shall be
responsible for all quality control during installation,equipment set-up and testing.
O. General Co-ordination(Date and Telephone Wiring)
I. Entire system shall conform completely with pertinent codes, laws, ordinances,
regulations, standards, criteria, or other requirements, including, but not limited to,
structural support, fire rating and health/safety requirements regarding all items. Such
conformity shall have precedence over this Specification.
2. Secure equipment firmly in place, including boxes, conduit, and cables. Provide
fastenings and supports adequate to support loads.
ELECTRICAL 16100-14
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
a. Furnish and install faceplates, boxes and inserts based on equipment as
manufactured by Hubbell.
L. Data-Category 5 5110 Series.
2. Voice-FTJ Type
b. Data runs will be punched down(8 wires) to Category V RJ45 patch panels
using EIA/TIA 568B standard.
C. Voice station wires will be punched down to 110 Type blocks.
d. Provide two (2) port faceplates for "Data Only" locations and three (3) port
faceplates for combined voice/data locations.
5. Voice cable to be Category 3.
J. Installation of Data and Telephone Cabling
1. Install materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions
to comply with governing regulations and industry standards applicable to the work
and as shown on approved Shop Drawings.
a. Contractor shall rigidly adhere to manufacturer's published specifications for
pulling tension,minimum bend radii, and sidewall pressure when installing all
cables.
rX
2. Arrange and mount all equipment and materials in a manner acceptable to the
Architect/Engineer and Owner.
3. Installation shall conform to the following basic guidelines:
a. Use of approved wire,cable,and wiring devices.
b. Neat and uncluttered wire termination.
C. Cable marking materials shall be employed throughout the length of each
cable run. The Contractor shall label each cable at the ends and at each
splice/junction point. Contractor shall label cables in accordance with
!! 2.13.M, "Labeling"of this section.
4. Provide fire stopping for electrical penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, and
other partitions of building construction.
5. Where existing cables(outlets)are being relocated to an adjacent wall, Contractor shall
cut off connector and pull cable to new outlet box location. Pull and label as specified.
K. Testing of Data Cables
1. Each pair and the shield of each cable shall be tested for opens, shorts, grounds, and
pair reversal. Grounded and reversed pairs shall be corrected by the Contractor. Open
ELECTRICAL 16100-13
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College .�
Northampton, MA
telephone wiring from the outlets indicated on the Contract Drawings to the Basement
Data/Telephone Room as indicated on the Drawings.
am
F. Each Telephone/Data outlet drop shall consist of one(1)data and one(1)voice drop, run from
each outlet location to the Telephone Room.
No
G. All data runs must be installed without cross-connects between wall jack and patch panel
terminations in Telephone Room.
1W
H. Voice runs may be cross connected on 110 blocks.
I. Data cabling shall be Category V, unshielded twisted pair, (UTP), with a blue sheath as so
manufactured by IBM, Belden,or AT&T.
1. The installed cabling must meet or exceed the following specifications:
go
a. UTP (unshielded twisted pair), Category V rated, 24 AWG solid bare CU,
PVC jacket,4 pairs.
ow
b. Nominal capacitance at 1 KHZ:4 PF/FT.
C. Nominal velocity of progragation: 67% „R
d. Nominal Delay: 1.5 NS/FT.
e. Nominal Condr/D.C.R.at 20 C: 27 OHMS/1000 FT.
f. Characteristic Impedance: 100 OHMS+/-15%.
2. Frequency Max.Attenuation Min. Crosstalk
1 MHz 6.3 dB/1,000 Ft.62 dB/1,000 Ft. .�.
4 MHz 13 dB/1,000 Ft.53 dB/1,000 Ft.
10 MHz 20 dB/1,000 Ft.47 dB/1,000 Ft.
16 MHz 25 dB/1,000 Ft.44 dB/1,000 Ft.
20 MHz 28 dB/1,000 Ft.42 dB/1,000 Ft.
100 MHz 67 dB/1,000 Ft.32 dB/1,000 Ft.
3. Physical Characteristics
a. Maximum pulling tension: 41 lbs. -•
b. Minimum bend radius: 2.00 in.
C. Nominal diameter: .217 in.
d. Cable shall be Belden No. 1583A or approved equal.
4. Wall Plates and Connectors
ELECTRICAL 16100-12
No Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
on Northampton, MA
3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit
module. Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable. The
+0 starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed.
a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have "Hand-OffAuto" selector switch,
three-pole, three-phase of NEMA size applicable, with three melting alloy
overload relays and three-position H-OA switch in cover of general purpose
enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 522. No substitutions will be
allowed.
b. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole magnetic contactor
without overload protection,with "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in cover of
general purpose enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 509. No
substitutions will be allowed.
C. A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each starter, fused,
with 24 volt secondary. Starter coils shall be 24 volt.
d. Furnish a minimum of one auxiliary contact in each starter for use by others
for interlocking purposes.
2.9 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (Furnished by Owner; Installed by Electrical Contractor)
A. The Electrical Contractor shall install a complete fire alarm system as shown on Drawings. All
fire alarm equipment shall be furnished by the Owner and shall be a Simplex 4002 system
complete with all peripherals, including auto dialer to Campus Security as directed by the
Owner.
�r
B. All wiring in conduit shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor.
C. The building shall be wired on a"zone per floor"basis unless otherwise indicated by the Owner.
2.10 TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEM
A. The building's internal telephone/data system is existing,and will be modified to accommodate
the new building layout as shown on the Drawings and directed by the Owner.
B. Existing head end equipment, including fiber optic data and telephone equipment mounted on
existing backboard in basement, shall remain and be sealed off with plastic covering during
construction to avoid dust intrusion as much as practicable.
C. New outlet locations,as shown on Drawings, shall consist of standard size outlet box, and cover
plates (smooth phenolic ivory), with 3 ports; (1) for data, (1) for telephone, and (1) for future
on expansion.
D. The work in this Section shall be performed by a Contractor who has been pre-qualified by the
College. Acceptable Contractor is Hogan.
E. Work of this Section shall include the installation, termination, and testing of all data and
ELECTRICAL 16100-11
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
3500 K. Compact fluorescent PL lamps shall be 3,500 K.
D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure. ..
E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the Fixture Schedule and by corresponding letter on
Drawings. Manufacturers' names and catalogue numbers are listed to show type and standard
of quality. Complete schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and approved by the
Architect and Owner.
2.8 MOTOR STARTERS AND SWITCHES
A. Furnish and install motor starting,protecting,and controlling devices for motors.
B. Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as required.
1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the "Off' position with
the door open. All current-carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion and
promote cool operation.
2. Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break such that, during normal operation of
the switch,the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the
operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The �*
handle and mechanism shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover,with positive
pad-locking provisions in the"Off'position.
3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless NEMA 3R
(rainproof)is required. Enclosures shall have gray enamel,electro-deposited on cleaned
phosphatized steel.
4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 volts AC.
5. Fuses shall be as required. .�
6. Switches shall be Square D, heavy duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosure.
C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single or double pole toggle
switches as specified, or required.
D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NEMA Standards, ...
sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted in general purpose enclosures unless
otherwise indicated on the Plans.
1. Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver alloy
contacts. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing
starter from panel.
2. Coils shall be of molded construction, replaceable from the front without removing
the starter from the panel.
ON
ELECTRICAL 16100-10
..
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton Cat.No.6898-HGI,or equal.
3. Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable, vertical, UL Listed, with Lexan
40 base and lid,4 screw attachment,Tay Mac Cat.No. 20-3-5-0,or equal.
4. Duplex receptacles, isolated ground- 20 A, 125 V, side and back wired, Leviton Cat.
No.5362-IG,or equal.
5. Light Switches, Single Pole- 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat.
No. 1221-2, or equal.
6. Light Switches, 3 Way- 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No.
1223-2,or equal.
w
7. Light Switches, 4 Way- 20 amp, 120/277 volt,back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No.
1224-2, or equal.
8. Switch and Pilot Light- 20 amp, 120 volt, side and back wired, red handle, Leviton
Cat.No. 1221-PLR, or equal.
9. Power receptacles shall be flush type, of NEMA configuration shown, with matching
cord and cap,Leviton, or equal,as follows:
a. Type'T!'-50 amp, 125/250 volt,3 pole,4 wire,Leviton Cat.No. 279.
b. Type"D"-30 amp, 125/250 volt,3 pole,4 wire, Leviton Cat.No. 278.
10. Clock hanger outlet with single receptacle and strong hook for hanging heavy clocks,
Leviton Cat. No. 688-I, ivory finish, or equal. Clocks shall be Simplex, style as chosen
by Architect.
11. Wall plates shall be smooth molded urea or phenolic plastic, ivory with matching
screws. To be Leviton Cat.No.86000 series,or equal.
2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans. All lighting fixtures to
have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in all respects with all
required glassware and lamps. All lamps to be new. Furnish and install all required hardware
to fit in all type ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and diffusers are installed. Any
chipped,cracked or otherwise defective material shall be replaced.
B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state electronic type, approvable for use on their system by the
Massachusetts Electric Co. Fixture/lamp combinations for which electronic ballasts are not
available shall be high power factor, energy efficient magnetic type, complete with automatic
reset thermal protector, and shall be CBM certified.
C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and size. T-8 lamps shall be
ELECTRICAL 16100-9
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections. ..
G. Wire and Cable to be by Cerro,Southwire,Triangle/PWC,or equal.
2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel unless otherwise noted
or required by the National Electrical Code,and shall be as required for their use. ..
B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the cast
aluminum,threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket.
C. Outlet boxes shall be of sizes and types to accommodate:
1. structural conditions.
2. size and number of raceways and conductors or cables entering.
3. device of fixture for which required.
D. Boxes occurring at plastered surfaces shall have a suitable plaster ring installed.
E. Where multiple devices are located at one point,gang type boxes shall be used.
F. Pull and junction boxes,whether surface or flush,shall be galvanized code gauge.
G. Pull boxes and wireways shall be standard NEMA 1 enclosures with cover plates and screws,
bonderized paint finished.
H. Pull and splice boxes not indicated on the Drawings shall be provided as required by the
National and the Massachusetts Electrical Codes. MW
I. Outlet boxes and covers shall be as manufactured by Steel City electrical Company, General
Electric Company,Raco,or approved equal. .�
2.5 NAMEPLATES
A. Fumish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels and safety switches. ..�.
The nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw attached. Submit
schedule of nameplate lettering for approval.
2.6 WIRING DEVICES
A. The Electrical Contractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. Where two or more
devices occur at one location, they shall be provided with a gang plate. All unused boxes to be
furnished with blank plates.
..A
1. Duplex Receptacles-20 amp, 125 volt with grounding screw, side and back wired. To
be Leviton Cat.No.5352-1,or equal.
ELECTRICAL 16100-8
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1.
a
PART 2 -MATERIALS
2.1 RACEWAYS
A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway runs concealed
in concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or pits, exposed below 6' above floor, and for
service entrance conductor sweeps. Conduit shall comply with the latest applicable Federal
Specifications.
B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all homerun raceways run in walls or partitions,
raceways run exposed inside the building, or run concealed in or above furred spaces unless
otherwise specified above. Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable
requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Couplings, connectors, and
fittings for electrical metallic tubing may be of the set screw type.
C. Electrical metallic tubing shall be used for all homeruns.
," D. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors, or other movable
equipment to facilitate removal and connections.
E. Raceway run underground outside the buildings may be scheduled 40 PVC with solvent welded
fittings.
2.2 WIREWAYS
A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with applicable
rules of the National Electrical Code. To be of code gauge steel and supported as required by
Code. Wireways shall be furnished and installed complete with the necessary complement of
fittings, connectors, and accessory parts. Wireways shall be of the "lay-in' type with standard
knockouts and with screw covers for full channel access. All sheet metal parts shall be coated
with a rust inhibitor and finished in grey baked enamel. All hardware shall be plated to prevent
corrosion.
2.3 CONDUCTORS
A. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity copper, with 600 volt insulation, and shall be of types
indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans. Aluminum conductors shall not be used.
B. Conductors#10 AWG and smaller,Type TI 1WN,solid.
C. Conductors#4 AWG through#8 AWG,Type THWN,stranded.
D. Conductors#3 AWG and larger,Type THW, stranded.
E. Branch circuit wiring located above lay in tile ceilings or fished in stud partitions may be Type
MC cable;single and multi circuit home runs shall be raceway and wire as specified.
ELECTRICAL 16100-7
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ..,
Northampton, MA
8. List of recommended spare parts.
9. Copies of all service contracts. .�
10. Performance curves for pumps, fans,etc.
11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local
representative for each item of equipment.
1.16 GUARANTEE
A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts ..
for a period of one(1)year after date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly
repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his «�
work and for repair to plaster,wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement
or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be
considered as being defective.
IM
1.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4° in diameter or smaller, required for the .m
installation of electrical apparatus in the building, shall be performed by the Electrical
Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to
keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. am
beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for
openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to co-
ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor failing
to co-ordinate,who shall make the corrections at his own expense. am
B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor.
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are
built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for conduit and equipment
where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Electrical Contractor shall do
all drilling required for the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the
General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner.
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to
remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Electrical Contractor
shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. AM
1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS
ELECTRICAL 16100-6
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
40 Smith College
Northampton, MA
B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60
in cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light
his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs,sockets,etc.
st C. All broken or waste material,rags,packing,etc.,resulting from his work shall be removed by the
individual Contractor.
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping, duct work, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage
w
rooms, closets,and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms.
B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the
building.
+�w
1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's
representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to
operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owners representative is properly
qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and
Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of
the Contractor,and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab
sheets placed before each Section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large
sheets of Drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved
equivalent.
C. The manual shall include the following information:
1 Description of systems.
2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of
equipment.
3. Winter/summer changeover procedures.
4. Schedule of adjustment, care,and routine maintenance for each item of equipment.
5. Lubrication chart.
6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of
each item of equipment.
7. Valve chart,if applicable.
ELECTRICAL 16100-5
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
Specifications, the Electrical Contractor will be required to remove such materials and
substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1.8 PERMITS, FEES,AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He
shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the
proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance
of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. •
B. The Electrical Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.9 TEMPORARY HOOKUPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or
sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. .�
1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A. The General Contractor will furnish and install temporary light and power as specified in
Division 1.
1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans,
elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to
supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work
indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements.
B. The Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the
Plans and not in the Specifications,or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably
implied in both. am
C. The Electrical Contractor shall not scale the Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and
accessories that may be required. The Electrical Contractor shall carefully investigate the
structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly,
furnishing such accessories as may be required to meet such conditions,at no additional cost. ,.�.
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the
building site when required,so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work
and that of other trades.
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract
shall be provided by the individual Contractor.
-.
ELECTRICAL 16100-4
..
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
H. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under
"! this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. Before submitting his bid, the Electrical Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and
Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since
the Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard
thereto.
J. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering
any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of
the Architect before proceeding with the work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be
determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that
substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in product
specifications and as approved by the Architect and Owner.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified
testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the
General Requirements.
1.6 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted other-wise, all materials used shall be U.S. made,
new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function
properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of
manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of
types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels
shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Contractor shall submit to the
Architect six(6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all
details,dimensions, capacities,etc. of all materials to be furnished.
4"
B. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the
Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all
�w changes which may be required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Contractor from
any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and
Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the
Contractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the
ELECTRICAL 16100-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
Massachusetts State Building Code, Massachusetts Electrical Code, and local laws, rules,
regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents
conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract
requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions
shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions
at no additional cost to the Owner.
..
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular
schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and
supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work-
B. The Electrical Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who
shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Electrical
Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or
replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the .•�
execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to
the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Electrical Contractor, it is agreed between
the Owner and the Electrical Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally
determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the
Contract for the work in question.
D. The Electrical Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to
expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials
as to sizes,locations,and means of support,to all other trades requiring such information. The
Electrical Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc.,
hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure
on the part of the Electrical Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required
to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit,wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is
diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the
building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Electrical Maw
Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at
the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs
shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor installing such items. ••»
G. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at
his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged
at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means.
ELECTRICAL 16100-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 16100-ELECTRICAL
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of
Division 1,as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section.
Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
"a incidental to the complete installation of all electrical work specified herein and/or indicated on
the Drawings, including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Branch Circuit Wiring and Conduit.
2. Feeders.
3. Telephone/Data System
4. Fire Alarm System.
5. Emergency Call For Aid System
6. Wiring devices and plates.
7. Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or Owner including final
connections to equipment.
8. Arrange for inspections and perform tests.
9. Guarantee and instructions.
10. Disconnect and remove existing electrical equipment made obsolete by new construction.
All removed equipment shall be the property of the Owner and delivered to such places as
designated by the Owner.
11. All existing electrical systems and equipment,which are to remain in operation, and which
interfere with new construction shall be relocated and reconnected as required.
1.3 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
ELECTRICAL 16100-1
qM
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as
manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc.,or approved equal,over Thermafiber fire safing.
D. Preparation
1. At all fire rated assemblies,prepare all penetrations for pipes.
E. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size, leaving no voids. Compress and
friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing
compound.
END OF SECTION
HVAC 15600-33
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.
3.9 IDENTIFICATION
A. All piping,valves, controls and equipment on the project shall be identified as specified herein.
All marks of identification shall be easily visible from the floor or usual point of vision. .A
B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of flow. The
letters shall be 1"high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6" long. The letters and flow arrows ...
shall be made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or snap-on, pre-printed
plastic labels. Install identification in each room and additionally so that markers are not over
50 feet on center. MW
C. Each valve,except runout valves,but including control valves, shall be tagged with a brass disc 1-
1/2"in diameter. The disc shall contain a number,and a valve list shall be provided under glass
in the Boiler Room showing the location of the valve,the service and the valve
and any pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve. Securely fasten the discs to the NO
valves with brass"S"hooks or chains.
D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be identified by engraved .�.
nameplates mounted just under the control or instrument. The engraved nameplates shall be
engraved on "Lamacoid", or approved equal plastic which will be black and show white letters
when engraved. Letters shall be 1/2"high.
E. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the Architectural section of
these Specifications has been accomplished.
3.10 FIRE SAFING
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work
including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers.
2. Fire sating at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, �..
mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms,
outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms.
B. Safing Insulation
1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or
Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length
and width,or as indicated on the Drawings.
HVAC 15600-32
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
10 Northampton,MA.
Drawings,or as directed.
B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor hired directly by the Owner.
3.6 INSULATION
A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation contractor regularly
engaged in that business.
B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running through radiator
covers. Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they are not visible from the floor.
W Remove all stickers from covering.
C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed with
on butt strips. Insulation shall run through all hangers, sleeves, and have an 18 gauge sheet metal
saddle equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes
on over 2" in diameter shall be supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to the
thickness of the insulation inside the vapor barrier jacket.
D. All fittings,valves,etc.shall be insulated with the proper factory pre-cut insulation. The ends of
the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edge adjacent to the
pipe covering tufted and tucked into fully insulated pipe fitting. The one piece PVC fittin g
cover shall then be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe covering.
3.7 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufacturers printed installation instructions,whether so shown on the Drawings or not,and
all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the HVAC Contractor
and be included in his bid.
3.8 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP
A. The entire Hearing and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of the building, and it
shall be established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing satisfactorily and
that all units are heating and ventilating satisfactorily. The systems shall be checked for
vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected.
B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and thoroughly
cleaned including coils, plenums, under equipment and any and all other areas around or in
equipment provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced
with new filters during final clean-up.
44 C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting
damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the
adjacent areas.
ON
D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new
40
HVAC 15600-31
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ••�
Northampton,MA
B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping.
D. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,
joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components as appropriate,and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
E. After system has been determined to be leak-free, the Engineer shall be notified and the test
shall be repeated in his or his representative's presence. �..
F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be removed
during the tests to prevent shock damage. This does not apply to control valves.
G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic or other temporary
means. All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the valve,fitting,joint,or section that is leaking
and reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein before.
3.4 CLEANING AND FLUSHING
MW
A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in
operation to rid the system of dirt, piping compound, mill scale, oil, and any and all other
material foreign to the water being circulated. Clean all strainers. ..
B. Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and other foreign matter
from entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall have the �.
open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each
piece of pipe, fitting,or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed.
C. After system is complete, the Heating&Ventilating Contractor shall add trisodium phosphate
in an aqueous solution to the system at the proportion of one pound per fifty gallons of water
in the system. After the system is filled with this solution, the system shall be brought up to ..
temperature and allowed to circulate for two hours. The system shall then be drained
completely and refilled with fresh water. The Engineer shall be given notice of this cleaning
operation and he or his representative shall be present to observe the cleaning operation, and, if
he deems it necessary,the cleaning operation shall be repeated.
D. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein, it shall be tested by litmus
paper or other dependable method and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side (ph = 7.5 plus
or minus). If the system is found to be still on the acid side, the cleaning by the use of
trisodium phosphate shall be repeated.
E. The HVAC Contractor shall not add any water treatment chemicals, or at any time "stop-leak"
compounds to the system.
..
3.5 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS
A. After completion of the installation of the heating,ventilating, and exhaust systems, and prior am
to acceptance by the Owner,all systems and appurtenances applicable to the above systems shall
be adjusted and balanced to deliver the water and air quantities as specified, indicated on the
Am
HVAC 15600-30
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
expansion loops. All pipe shall be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies, reamed and burrs
removed.
B. Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch connections or
reducers. Connections to equipment shall be full size of tappings. Reductions in the run of
" pipe shall be made with eccentric or concentric reducers as required for draining and venting.
C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces, shafts,
chases, or above hung ceilings.
D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms, vertical pipe shafts, above hung
ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum headroom and clearances
for access to other equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits, lighting fixtures,
other piping,ducts,and equipment of other trades.
E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit future replacement,
removal and servicing of equipment. Flexible connections where required to isolate movement
of equipment from piping system or of piping system from equipment, shall be as specified.
F. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation, blow out piping with
compressed air and/or water to remove all chips and scale and flush and drain until all
traces of dirt, scale and other foreign matter have disappeared. Refer to other sections for
additional requirements.
G. Vent all high points and drain all low points throughout the system.
H. Connections and tie-ins to existing piping systems shall be coordinated with the Owner. The
HVAC Contractor is responsible for draining, flushing, re-filling(adding glycol if required)and
air removal of the existing system. System shall be fully restored and operational.
3.3 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS
A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be hydraulically
tested as specified herein. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all equipment required to
make the tests specified herein. Piping may be tested a section at a time in order to facilitate the
construction.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water and bring the
section up to pressure with a test pump. These tests shall be conducted before any insulation is
installed and any insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed. Gauges used in the
tests shall have been recently calibrated with a dead weight tester.
C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less
than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure
for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a check to
verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90%
of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME
HVAC 15600-29
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
The Control Manufacturer shall furnish schematic systems control diagrams to be
delivered to the Owner on AutoCAD disks.
5. Control and management systems shall neither be considered complete nor acceptable
until all conditions of the Sequence of Operation have been attained, all temperatures
are maintained within specified limits of all operating conditions, and all systems
damper leakage of controlled within specified limits.
J. Service and Guarantee:
1. The complete installation, including all equipment, shall be guaranteed free from
defects in workmanship and material for a period of 12 months from date of
acceptance in writing by the Owner. Provide at no cost to the Owner, all necessary
service,adjusting, and checking during the 12 month guarantee period.
2. During warranty period, the ATC Contractor shall update and implement all latest
revisions of software offered by the Contractor that applies to this Project.
PART 3-INSTALLATION
3.1 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING ..
A. Drilling of all holes 2" diameter and smaller required for the installation of heating and
ventilating piping and equipment shall be performed by the HVAC Contractor. Cutting and
patching shall be performed by the General Contractor in accordance with the General
Conditions. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to
keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Location for chases, openings, etc. shall be checked
by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other Divisions
shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor,who shall make the corrections as his own
expense.
M,
B. Work shall include furnishing and locating inserts required before the floors and walls are built,
or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves and
inserts were not installed, or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all
drilling required for the installation of hangers. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping
or equipment shall be performed by the General Contractor.
C. As the work nears completion, all pipe cutting and threading, etc. shall be done in a location
approved by the Engineer.
D. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to
remain as finished or be painted later. Should use of such an area be necessary, the HVAC
Contractor shall cover the working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner.
3.2 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall be firmly
supported throughout. Provision for expansion and contraction shall be made with offsets or
HVAC 15600-28
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
Following are the typical sequences of operation for HVAC equipment provided by Automated
Logic's System 20/20. Within each section, each paragraph describes a specific control
so sequence for a component of the equipment; start stop, status, etc. Each specific control
sequence will require appropriate I/O points,which are scheduled on the Drawings.
an 1. Finned Tube Radiators
a. Each radiator shall be subject to a 2-way electric activated control valve. On a
call for heat the control valve shall open and when temperature set point is
satisfied the valve shall close.
on 2. Exhaust Fans
a. Each new exhaust fan shall be interlocked with the existing control to run
go during the occupied period and be shut down in the unoccupied period.
I. Adjustment and Calibration:
w�
1. On completion of the job, the ATC Contractor shall completely calibrate, test, and
adjust, ready for use, all electronic controls, thermostats, valves, damper motors, and
relays provided under his contract and be present for functional tests on systems. The
Building Management System shall be completely checked,test run, and adjusted.
2. Before the Engineer is asked to witness the functional tests, the entire control and
management system must be complete,controls calibrated. The controlled devices will
be physically inspected and checked to assure that these terminal devices are, in fact,
under proper control and working smoothly over their entire range of operation.
3. The adjustment procedure shall include the following steps:
a. Preliminary set up and calibration per Specifications and Shop Drawings.
b. Physical checkout of all components for completeness and accuracy,
simultaneously with mechanical system balancing.
C. Review of system with Engineer.
d. Functional test for Owners benefit, instruction,and acceptance.
e. Not less than 30 or more than 60 days after systems have been in full
operation, review problems with Owner, recheck all adjustments, and
recalibrate as required.
4. The Control Manufacturer shall provide a complete instructional manual covering the
function and operation of all control and management system components on the job,
which shall include a troubleshooting and operating procedure. This manual shall be
furnished to the Owners operating personnel and shall show the total integrated
control system. Competent technicians shall be provided for instruction purposes.
HVAC 15600-27
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ..�
Northampton,MA
b. Configuration of all application programs to provide the sequence of .,
operation indicated
C. Graphics of each system as shown on the I/O Summary Tables
d. Alarm limits and alarm messages for all critical and non-critical alarms
e. Configuration of all reports and point summaries indicated .a
G. Systems Software
L The central site shall display graphically, in up to 256 different colors, the following
system information:
General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local
landmarks.
Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a
range of colors which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective
setpoints.The colors shall be updated dynamically as zones' comfort condition change. *�*
Locations of space sensors shall also be shown for each zone. Setpoint adjustment and
color band displays shall be provided.
Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components
serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. It shall
also provide a current status of all VO points being controlled and applicable to each
piece of equipment including analog readouts in appropriate engineering units at
appropriate locations on the graphic representation.
2. Each category of software shall consist of interactive software modules. Each module
shall have an associated priority level and shall execute as determined by the program
controller as defined in the real time operating system.
3. The central site shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional mode
other than energy management, i.e., incoming alarms shall be displayed while the
operator is in a word processing, spreadsheet, or other operating mode. The system
must automatically switch from a non-energy management mode,
respond to an alarm, and return to the exact position left in the previous functional
mode.
4. The building operator shall be able to communicate and direct all control functions ...
through the use of a 2-button "mouse' operator interface to monitor and control all
functions and sequences within the system.
H. Sequences of Operation:
I-VAC 15600-26
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
Inc. Hawkeye 735.
f. Humidity Sensors: Sensors shall have an accuracy of +5% over a range of
20%to 95%RH,Visala Mod. HMW-40U.
an g. Current Sensing Relays: Relays shall monitor status of motor loads. Switch
shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application.
The setpoint of the contact operation shall be field adjustable.
h. Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for 150%of the loading
application, with self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts, enclosed in
w dustproof enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium contacts with a
minimum life span rating of one million operations. Relays shall be equipped
with coil transient suppression devices.
i. Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than 10
billion ohms with a breakdown voltage of 15 V root mean square, or greater,
at 60 Hz. The contact operating life shall be 10 million operations or greater.
The ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be 20°F-140 0F. Input
impedance shall be greater than 500 ohms. Relays shall be rated for the
application. Operating and release time shall be 10 milliseconds or less.
Transient suppression shall be provided as an integral part of the relays.
j. Freezestat shall be capillary type equal to Johnson Control,Model A70HA 1C.
k. Control valves shall be DDC modulating type. All twoway valves shall be
Spartan two position valves. All three-way valves shall be Barber Colman with
Belimo Actuators,Model AF24-S.
1. All control dampers shall be opposed blade type with edge and jam seals and
internal linkage. Damper operators shall be provided for all dampers equal to
Belimo AF24-8 with AV10-18 or 2G JSA shaft extensions where required.
uw 5. Local Site Communication Network
a. The modules shall communicate within their respective network with a token
passing technique. This network shall be consistent with the IEEE RS485
standard, including a minimum baud rate of 9,600 BPS maintained at a
minimum of 10,000 feet. The Contractor shall provide all wiring required for
the local site network.
F. Software
1. The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the
functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design for
flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. The software shall, as a minimum,
include:
a. Complete database entry
0
HVAC 15600-25
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ..e
Northampton, MA
2) OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of -52°F to
152°F and an accuracy of within +l°F in this temperature range.
Kele Precon Model ST-O.
3) Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy, of+0.25°F in the
range of 45°F to 96°F,ALC Model BA-10K 2-RSO-RLC Type 3 with
network connector,warm/cool adjustment, override switch and LED
Occupied/Unoccupied indicator.
4) Chilled water sensors shall have an accuracy of+0.25°F in their range
of application.
5) Hot water temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of + 0.75°F
over the range of their application.
b. Pressure Instruments
1) Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors. Sensors shall have a 4-20
MA output proportional signal with provisions for field checking.
Sensors shall withstand up to 150% of rated pressure, without
damaging the device. Accuracy shall be within +2% of full scale.
Sensors shall be manufactured by MAMAC No. PR 272-2-XX B-1-2-2.
2) Pressure Switches. Pressure switches shall have a repetitive accuracy
of + 2% of range and withstand up to 150% of rated pressure.
Sensors shall be diaphragm or bourdon tube design. Switch
operation shall be adjustable over the operating pressure range. The
switch shall have an application rated Form C,snap-acting,selfwiping
contact of platinum alloy, silver alloy, or gold plating. Switches shall
be manufactured by Johnson Controls,Model P-74FA 5-C.
C. Flow Switches: Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of+ 1% of their
operating range. Switch actuation shall be adjustable over the operating flow
range. Switches shall have snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the specific
electrical application. ...
d. Watt-hour Transducers: Watt-hour transducers shall have an accuracy of
+0.25% for kW and kWh outputs from full lag to full lead power factor.
Input ranges for kW and kWh transducers shall be selectable without
requiring the changing of current or potential transformers, and shall have dry
contact pulse accumulation. ..
e. Voltage-to-Digital Alarm Relays: Relays shall monitor status of boiler or chiller
safeties and overloads and shall be sized and connected so as not to impede ...
the function of the monitored contacts. Switch shall have self wiping, snap-
acting Form C contacts rated for the application, equal to Veris Industries,
HVAC 15600-24
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
C. In the event of a loss of communication with the TNI, each T-Line controller
shall store a default algorithm which maintains the space temperature until
communication with the TNI is restored.
d. Each TNI shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands via
a microcomputer resident in the TNI. The database and all application
programs for each T-Line shall be stored in read/writable non-volatile memory
within the TNI. All nonvolatile memory shall have a battery backup of at
* least five years.
e. The TNI shall contain both software and hardware to perform full DDC/PID
control loops. T-Line shall be able to provide normal binary type output.
f. Each T-Line shall be able to support various type of zone temperature sensors,
such as: temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with built-in local
override switch,with setpoint adjustment switch.
W g. Each T-Line for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow transducer for
accurate air flow measurement in order to provide the Pressure Independent
VAV operation.
h. Each T-Line and TNI shall have LED indication for visual status of
communication,power, and all outputs.
i. Each TNI shall be software programmable for communicating at 9600 baud to
38.4 Kbps. Circuits shall be optically isolated.
3. Terminal Control Devices-T-Line
a. Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC maximum, 3 amp
maximum current. Each configurable as normally open or normally closed,
and either dry contact or bussed.
b. Universal inputs: Thermistor, dry contacts or 0-5VDC with 0-100K Ohm
input impedance.
C. Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one thermistor input,
one local setpoint adjustment, one timed local override switch and an
occupancy LED indicator.
4. Instrumentation and Control
a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy ratings as
indicated and/or required for the application and shall permit accuracy rating
of within 1%of the temperature range of their intended use.
1) Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the averaging type and
have an accuracy of+1°F. Kele Precon Model ST-FZ.
HVAC 15600-23
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
performance.
1. Global Network Controller-LANgate
a. The LANgate shall be a microprocessor-based communications device which
acts as a gateway between the System Control Module Network(CMnet) and
the Global Network(Lgnet).
b. Both the Cmnet and the Lgnet shall be"peer-to-peer" networks which allow all
control modules to communicate with equal authority.
C. Each LANgate shall support a Cmnet on which may reside any combination
of up to 100 zone controllers, rooftop unit controllers, and/or Control
Modules.
d. The LANgate shall be responsible for routing global information from the
various Cmnets which may be installed throughout a building.
e. The Lgnet may configure as RS485 (38.4 Kbps), ARCnet (2.5 Mbps), or �*
Ethernet (10 Mbps), or Token Ring (16Mbps) all of which may be
implemented over fiber optic,twisted pair,or coaxial cable.
f. Each Cmnet shall support up to 100 controllers.
g. Multiple LANgates can be added to the Lgnet if the projects require more
than 100 controllers.
.N
h. Up to a total of 60 LANgates can be added to the Lgnet, each supporting up
to 100 controllers(total capacity exceeds 500,000 points per Lgnet).
i. The LANgate shall provide two RS232 ports which can be connected to me
Central Site Workstations,portable computers, or modems.
j. LANgate shall provide full arbitration between multiple users, whether they Ow
are communicating through the same LANgate or different ones.
2. Terminal Control Modules-T-Line
a. Terminal Control Modules shall be capable of providing the Direct Digital
Control of single zone terminal HVAC units; air handling units, fan coil -�
units,exhaust fans,unit ventilators, etc.
b. Each T-Line controller shall communicate with the Cmnet through the Tnet
Interface Module(TNI). The TNI shall provide one RS485 port for a Cmnet
connection and one RS485 port for the Tnet connection. In addition, a
direct connect RS485 port shall also be provided for connection of a laptop
computer.
HVAC 15600-22
NO
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
M Smith College
Northampton,MA
programs to ensure they are free from design errors and that they accurately accomplish
the application sequence of operations. The simulation must show each output value
and how it varies in relation to an artificial time clock. The time clock may run at
normal time increments, increased increments (fast motion) or decreased increments
(slow motion).
D. Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and terminated by the ATC
Contractor. Control wiring shall be as follows:
1. All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature control system
components,such as,but not limited to,PE's and high and low limit protective devices.
2. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system components, such
as solenoid air valve.
3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from terminal
strips to field mounted devices.
4. All wiring to the"Auto'side of hand-off auto switches on units being controlled by the
ATC Contractor.
5. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in temperature
control panels.
6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC subcontractor from
sources provided by the Electrical Contractor specifically for that purpose.
7. All wiring shall comply with national,state,and local electrical codes. All power wiring
will be installed and terminated by the Electrical Contractor. Power wiring shall be
defined as follows:
a. Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater than 120 volt(except
for power to the temperature control panels).
b. Wiring of power feeds to disconnects,starters,and electric motors.
C. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control panels where
required.
OF d. Installation of and wiring of line power to fused disconnects for each air
compressor.
e. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors.
f. Wiring from disconnects to compressor motor starters and from compressor
motor starters to compressor motor.
E. Field Hardware: Field hardware must be of a modular design to ensure reliability and system
a
HVAC 15600-21
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
d. Uniform Building Code
e. Uniform Mechanical Code
f. Uniform Plumbing Code
g. UL916
h. Note: Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive shall apply. ..
Nothing in these plans and specifications shall be construed to permit work
not conforming to applicable codes.
C. Submittals, Documentation and Acceptance "
1. Shop Drawings. A minimum of six (6) copies of Shop Drawings shall be submitted
and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including
manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, and installation
instructions. Shop Drawings shall also contain complete wiring, routing, schematic
diagrams, tag number of devices, software descriptions, calculations, and any other
details required to demonstrate that the system will function properly. Drawings shall
show proposed layout and installation of all equipment and the relationship to other
parts of the work.
2. Shop Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer and the College before any
equipment is installed. Therefore, Shop Drawings must be submitted in time for ..
review so that all installations can be completed per the project's completion schedule.
3. All Drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and updated or ..
corrected to provide"as-built" Drawings to show exact installation. The system will not
be considered complete until the"as-built" Drawings have received their final approval.
The Contractor shall deliver three(3) sets of"as-built" Drawings, and one (1) CADD
disk of these Drawings.
4. Before final configuration, the Contractor shall provide 1/O Summary forms that
include: ..
a. Description of all points.
b. Listing of binary and analog hardware required to interface to the equipment
for each function.
C. Listing of all application programs associated with each piece of equipment.
d. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure
5. Provide an accurate graphic flow diagram for each software program proposed to be
used on the project as part of the submittal process. Revisions made as a result of the
submittal process, during the installation,startup or acceptance portion of the project,
shall be accurately reflected in the "as-built" graphic software flow diagrams herein
required by this specification. ..
6. The Contractor shall be able to simulate the operation of all software application
HVAC 15600-20
Ew
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
1. All temperature control work shall be performed by Yankee Technology, Inc. of
' Ludlow,MA. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to coordinate all HVAC work
with the Temperature Control Contractor prior to submitting a bid.
2. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary hardware, wiring, pneumatic
tubing,computing equipment and software as defined in this specification.
3. All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly
manufactured and available and not custom designed especially for this project. All
systems and components, except site specific software, shall have previously been
thoroughly tested and proven in actual use prior to installation on this project.
4. The system architecture shall be fully modular permitting expansion of application
software,system peripherals,and field hardware.
5. The system,upon completion of the installation and prior to acceptance of the project,
on shall perform all operating functions as detailed in this Specification.
6. Provide the following system hardware:
o
a. Central Site(s)and Control Modules
b. All sensing devices and necessary transducers to perform the functions listed
in I/O Summary Tables.
C. All relays, switches, indicating devices, and transducers required to perform
the functions listed in I/O Summary Tables.
d. All monitoring and control wiring and air tubing.
e. All modems and accessories.
7. Provide all software identified in Part 3 of this Specification. The database required for
implementation of these specification shall be provided by the Contractor, including:
point descriptor, alarm limits, calibration variables, graphics, reports and point
summaries.
8. The system as specified shall monitor, control, and calculate all of the points and
perform all the function as listed in I/O Summary Tables attached to the end of this
specification.
9. Codes and Regulations. All electrical equipment and material and its installation shall
conform to the current requirements of the following authorities:
a. Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA)
b. National Electric Code(NEC)
C. National Fire Code
HVAC 15600-19
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
A. Furnish and install access panels at all valves, volume dampers, tec. installed above plastered
ceilings, in walls, and all other non-accessible spaces. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be
Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12"x 12"); access panels in walls shall be Karp type DSG211
"Universal"(12"x 12").
2.14 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
A. General Requirements
1. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic.
2. The controls shall be a direct expansion of the Campus' existing energy management
system as manufactured by automated Logic System 20/20,and shall be extended from
the existing communication lines located in The Physical Plant. It is mandatory that
the installed system be properly interfaced with the existing central.site(CS) computer
hardware ALC 20/20 configuration and the existing master central site software
library, located at the HVAC Department Building. It will be the Contractor's
responsibility to develop site specific operating parameters,building name,general area
maps, floor plans, mechanical system graphics, thermal graphs, all to be displayed
graphically at the central site(CS)via the existing software programs.
MW
3. All components of the direct digital controllers shall be manufactured by Automated
Logic, or equal, with peripheral electric/electronic devices manufactured by Barber
Colman. ow
4. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic, i.e.
Yankee Technology, Inc., of Ludlow, MA. The system shall be a properly integrated MW
system installed by competent mechanics regularly employed in the profession of
temperature control. Unless specified to the contrary, all equipment shall be fully
proportioning. The control system shall be complete in all respects, including room
thermostats, immersion thermostats, switches, relays, valves, cabinets and other no
accessory equipment, and a complete system of control wiring for integration into
existing remaining reused controls where specified, all connected and properly
integrated to the control system. °"
5. The temperature control system shall be DDC and shall utilize electric/electronic
power for the control dampers and valves. The control systems Lans connection shall WX
be extended from the existing system.
6. All wiring, conduit,junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the temperature control ••
system shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Contractor and shall conform to
all standards and codes as described under Section 16000 - Electrical Work Wiring
shall be in metal raceways where required by prevailing codes.
7. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to have "Lamicoid"
nameplates,isolated control valves,relays,etc.to be marked with stamped tape. .�
B. Scope of Work
HVAC 15600-18
Im
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
wo Smith College
Northampton,MA
20. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B 16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for
steel flanges,unless otherwise indicated.
21. Note: Grooved piping will NOT be allowed.
" 2.11 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Provide packless expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with materials
and pressure/temperature ratings selected by Installer to suit intended service. Select packless
expansion joints to provide 200%absorption capacity of piping expansion between anchors.
�r B. Expansion Compensators: Pressure rated for 60 psi for low pressure systems, 2-ply phosphor
bronze bellows, brass shrouds and end fittings for copper piping systems, or 2-ply stainless steel
bellows, carbon steel shrouds and end fittings for steel piping systems. Provide internal guides
s�Ir and anti-torque devices,and removable end clip for proper positioning.
C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide expansion compensators of
one of the following:
Flexonics Div.; UOP, Inc.
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
Keflex, Inc.
Metraflex Co.
Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc.
D. Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated.
Construct with 4-finger spider traveling inside guiding sleeve, with provision for anchoring to
building substrate.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe alignment
guides of the following:
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
Metraflex Co.
2.12 STRAINERS
A. Pipeline strainers shall be full size,iron body, "Y"pattern and shall be installed on the inlet side
of each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. Strainers 2" and smaller shall
have screwed ends; 2-1/2"and larger shall have flanged ends.
B. Strainers for steam and condensate systems over 50 psig. shall be 250 lb. class. Strainers for
other systems shall be 125 lb. class. Strainers shall be Illinois, Barnes and Jones,Armstrong, or
equal, and shall be so installed as to permit ready removal of basket. Each strainer 2-1/2" and
larger shall be provided with hose end globe valve on blow-off.
2.13 ACCESS PANELS
HVAC 15600-17
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ,..
Northampton,MA
Schedule 40 piping,Class 300 for Schedule 80.
a. Material Group: Group 1.1
b. End Connections: Buttwelding
C. Facings: Raised-face
5. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short-
radius elbows and returns;rated to match connected pipe.
6. Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ASTM A714.
7. Forged Branch Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, Bonney "Weldolets"
or"Threadolets",or equal.
8. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe;except do not use
less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2" and
where pipe size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full length (no close-
nipples).
9. Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type as indicated for each service; hard-drawn temper for ••
water piping;soft temper for oil piping.
10. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306.
11. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B280.
12. Wrought-Copper Solder Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22.
13. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B 16.23.
14. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B 16.29.
15. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43.
16. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B 16.15.
17. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with
Section II, Part C,ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials.
18. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
19. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with SFA-
5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal
materials.
HVAC 15600-16
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
G. Insulation thickness shall be as follows:
Minimum Pipe Insulation Required:
1. Hot Water/Supply and Return:
a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1-1/2 in.
b. Runouts 1 in.and less: 1-1/2 in.
C. Runouts 1-1/4 in.to 2 in.: 2 in.
d. Runouts 2-1/2 in.to 4 in.: 2 in.
sws 2.10 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. General
1. Reference is made to specifications of recognized authorities to establish quality. Latest
editions of their publications at time of bidding shall be in force.
2. All piping shall have manufacturer's name or trademark rolled into each and every
length of pipe.
3. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread conforming to
ANSI B2.1-1968.
4. Qualify welding procedures,welders and operators in accordance with ASME B31.1, or
ASME B31.9,as applicable,for shop and project site welding of piping work.
B. Application
1. Hot Water Supply and Return and Steam Supply and Condensate Return: Black steel
wi. pipe, Schedule 40, size 2" and smaller threaded, 2-1/2" and larger welded, or Type T'
copper for hot and dual temperature water.
C. Materials
1. Black Steel Pipe:ASTM A53,A106 or A120;except comply with ASTM A53 or A106
where close coiling or bending is required.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3;plain or galvanized as indicated. Class
150 for Schedule 40 piping,Class 300 for Schedule 80.
3. Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714;Class 4;Grade IV.
4. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following
material group, end connection and facing except as otherwise indicated, Class 150 for
HVAC 15600-15
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
connecting horizontal run.
owl
F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all piping; hangers to be
installed outside pipe insulation.
G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT-121C plastic coated riser clamp;to be am
installed immediately below a coupling.
2.09 INSULATION "`
A. Pipe Insulation
am
1. All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire retardant and shall have
a flame spread rating not exceeding 25, smoke developed rating not exceeding 50, all
complying with NFPA 225 and/or U.L. 723. Adhesives used for applying and sealing XW
jackets shall also conform to these same fire retardant and smoke ratings.
2. On exposed insulation, all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the top of the pipe and •m
circumferential joints shall be kept to a minimum. Raw ends of insulation shall be
concealed by neatly folding in the ends of the jackets. Fittings,valve bodies, and flanges
shall be furnished with the same jacket materials used on adjoining insulation. .,
3. Covering shall not be applied until all parts of the work have been tested by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer. am
4. A vapor barrier shall be installed on all new hot water/chilled water piping. It shall be
applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions to maintain the integrity of ow
the vapor barrier.
5. Attention is called for to the fact that on all hot water/chilled water, refrigerant, and
condensate drain piping, oversized pipe hangers shall be furnished and pipe insulation
shall be applied continuous along the pipe passing inside the hanger.
6. Pipe insulation shall be closed cell Armaflex insulation as manufactured by Gustin
Bacon,Manville,or other approved equal.
7. All hot water, supply and return piping shall be insulated with fiberglass pipe **�
insulation, or approved equal. The insulation shall have an average thermal
conductivity not to exceed .25 BTU in. per sq. ft. per F. per hour at a mean
temperature of 75 degrees F. Thickness of the insulation shall be as scheduled below.
The insulation shall be applied over clean dry pipe with all joints firmly together.
Longitudinal jacket laps and the butt strips shall be smoothly secured with Benjamin
Foster 85-20 adhesive. Note: All refrigerant piping run outdoors shall be covered with
an aluminum jacket and secured with stainless steel bands.
8. Insulation of all steam and condensate piping shall be fiberglass with jacketed cover,
thickness to be as listed below. .R
no
HVAC 15600-14
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
bushings, complete with lever. Provide open position stop and plastic cap on all valves, which
are labeled"Balance Valves" on the Drawings. All valves at fan coil unit shall be furnished with
wt
drain kit.
J. Pump discharge check valves shall be Muessco, Williams & Hager, or Smolensky equal to
' Muessco 105-DT silent type, steel body, stainless steel trim and spring, renewable seat, 150 psig
ASME rated.
2.6 UNIONS
A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of the system in which
they are installed. In black steel piping systems, they shall be 200 lb. black malleable iron with
brass ground joint equal to Dart Figures 0832,0834,0835, 0836 or 0838. In copper and brass
piping,they shall be 125 lb.bronze or brass with ground joint.
+wr
B. Flanged unions for welded pipe shall be weld neck, 150 lb. raised face. Flanged joints shall be
packed with impregnated asbestos gaskets placed inside the bolt circle with graphite applied to
both faces.
C. Dielectric unions shall be provided between ferrous and non-ferrous piping to prevent galvanic
corrosion. The dielectric unions shall meet the requirements for tensile strength of pipe fittings
in accordance with Federal Specification WWU-531 and shall be suitable for temperatures and
pressures encountered. The ends shall be threaded, flanged, brazed, or soldered to match
adjacent piping. The metal parts of the union shall be separated so that the electrical current is
below 1 percent of the galvanic current,which would exist with metal to metal contact.
2.7 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Standard IPS steel or wrought iron sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed pipes pass
through masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line size.
* Insulated piping sleeves shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve without
gouging.
2.8 HANGERS
A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company,Carpenter& Paterson,Fee&Mason,
or equal.
B. For all pipe 2-1/2"and larger-Grinnell Figure No. 20, at 10'intervals.
C. For all other suspended piping-Grinnell Figure 70 at 6' intervals for tubing 14/4" or less, 10'
intervals for piping at 1-1/2"and larger.
D. All han g ers directly in contact with non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or plastic
coated.
E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within P of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe
not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the elbow on the
HVAC 15600-13
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
B. All water valves installed in copper tube piping shall be, in general, solder end pattern, all
bronze with iron hand wheel, rated for not less than 200 pounds non-shock water pressure. In an
general,all line service valves are to be gate valves, manual vents are to be globe type.
C. Solder end valves are as follows:
1. Gate Valves-Stockham Figure B-109.
2. Globe Valves-Stockham B-14T. aw
3. Check Valves-Stockham B-309.
4. Drain Valves-Watts No.B-6000 ball valve with hose adapter, cap and chain.
5. Ball Valves-Watts Series 86001-SS-XH. •
D. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows:
1. Gate: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure 8120; 3 in. and larger - Stockham
Figure G-620 or 6623.
2. Globe: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120 or 752; 3 in. and larger -
Stockham Figure G-609 or G-613.
3. Check: 24/2 in. and smaller -Stockham Figure B-319; 3 in. and larger - Stockham
Figure G-931.
4. Ball Valves: Watts Series 600-SS-SH. am
E. All shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and larger shall be Watts Series G-4000, cast iron body, 316, steel
disc and shaft, Nordel EPT seat, designed for bubbletight shutoff. Valves to be fitted with lever ""
operator for two position operation.
F. Gate and/or globe valves shall not be used as substitutes for the following valves when used as
balance valves.
G. Balance and/or shut-off valves 4 in. and larger-Tour&Anderson Series STAF, neoprene seat, •-
semi-steel body, with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working
pressure, 125 pound ANSI flanges, Figure 101F or 118F, G6-HI2. Provide open position stop
on all valves. Provide hand operators for all valves which are 6 ft.or more above the floor. �.
H. Balance and/or shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and 3 in. sizes-Tour&Anderson Series STAF, lever
operated, faced plug, neoprene seat, semi-steel body with stainless steel or bronze top and
bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, Figure 118. Provide open position stops for all
valves.
I. For 2 in. and smaller - Balancing valves shall be Tour & Anderson Figure STAD or STA D, ..
semi-steel body, bronze plug with neoprene or Teflon resilient face, bronze top and bottom
HVAC 15600-12
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
pressure. Duct shall also be UL rated for velocities up to 6,500 F.P.M.E.
W R. Flexible Connections: Provide, in each duct connection to every air handling unit and fan, 30
ounce double neoprene coated woven glass fabric flexible connection not less than 4" long
securely held to retaining clamps.
�r
2.2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Layout and details shall clearly indicate compliance with the above Specifications. Any
variations in design details, fittings, or accessory items for which approval is requested shall be
specifically marked on the Drawings, as shall any major variations from the Drawing (minor
variations are assumed to be field conditions). Drawings for Fan Room shall be at 3/8 in. = 1
ft.0 in. scale.
B. The Drawings shall not be submitted to the Engineer for approval until the ductwork has been
coordinated with all other trades. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assume the responsibility
for and bear the cost of any alterations required after approval because of inaccurate Shop
Drawings or lack of proper coordination, and also for any changes in sheet metal erected prior
to approval of Shop Drawings.
2.3 AIR DIFFUSERS,GRILLES,AND REGISTERS
A. Diffusers,grilles, and registers shall be Anemostat Waterloo,Titus, or Barber Colman, equal to
those specified in the Following paragraphs. See Drawings for sizes, cfm s, locations, and
° qualities of various types. In general,all units shall be installed with face bars parallel to floor or
nearest wall. All volume control dampers shall be key operated. Finish for all diffusers,grilles,
and registers to be factory finished with color selected by the Engineer.
B. Ceiling Exhaust Register(CER)-Titus Model 350FL/AG-15 aluminum deflected blade register,
offuhite finish,with opposed blade damper.
2.4 FINNED RADIATION
A. Furnish and install finned tube radiators as shown on Drawings. Radiator assemblies shall be
I=B=R rated,Sterling,Vulcan, or equal.
B. Type "A" shall be Sterling 'Versa-Line" Style "JVB-S" with S144 4 1/4" square steel fins, .032
thick, 40 per foot, 1 1/4" iron pipe element, two tier element, two tier 20" high cover, full
backplate, rated at 1450 Btuh per foot at 170 deg. F. AWT with ball bearing hanger bracket
with cradle.
2.5 VALVES
A. All valves shall be of the same make except as noted below for special valves and shall be Crane,
Watts,Walworth, or Tour&Anderson manufacture based on the following Stockham valves.
All ball valves shall be Watts, and all balancing valves shall be Tour and Anderson. No
' ! substitutions will be allowed.
w
HVAC 15600-11
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8'-0" centers or closer where required so that the
ductwork can support the weight of a man at any point.
L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for,the sheet metal duct size shown on the Drawings
must be increased to provide the clear inside dimensions or cross sectional area shown on the
Drawings.
M. Duct joint sealing, reinforcing, flanges, etc. for rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be based on
maintaining airtight ducts at 2"WG Maximum static pressure with maximum leakage of 5%of
total fan capacity; 1/2 of 1% for round and oval ducts. All joints in ductwork shall be sealed
with U.L.classified United Duct Sealer,or equal.
N. Duct systems shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown, to control and
adjust the total volume of each system, each zone, in each branch and at each diffuser or grille.
The HVAC Contractor shall consult with the College's Balancing Contractor for the proper
placement of volume dampers prior to installation. Volume dampers shall be of the butterfly
type with 18 gauge galvanized iron blade. All dampers shall be equipped with Duro-Dyne Type
UNXLD locking quadrant. All dampers shall be provided with damper bearings on each end
of shaft mounted on a 2" x 3" x 1/8" plate held to duct with sheet metal screws. Maximum
width of single blades shall be 14". Splitter dampers shall not be used. ..
O. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings fire and/or smoke dampers with a UL label
for not less than 1-1/2 hour fire protection raring in accordance with UL-555 continuing
inspection service. Blades and frame shall be galvanized steel construction with blades of an
interlocking design, having two folded guides which serve as stops. Fusible links shall be equal
to Grinnell Fig. 1351, 20 pounds, issue A. Dampers shall be installed according to latest
edition of NFPA-90A, mounted with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" returning angles on both sides of
partition,wall, or floor, and sleeves as per the UL test under which the damper fire rating was
obtained. Angles shall completely close the wall opening and provide anchorage to the
dampers. Damper blade stack shall not reduce duct free area.
P. Where called for on Drawings, final connections to diffusers and registers shall be made with
flexible ductwork, UL listed, Class 1. To be Thermaflex S-LP-10 for exhaust/return, M-KA for
supply, or equal. joints shall be sealed with duct tape and Thermaflex duct straps. Connection
to rigid ductwork shall be made with spun conical taps.
Q. Flexible Air Duct:
1. Flexible air duct shall be Wiremold,Thermoflex,Cleveflex,or equal,and shall be equal ••�•
to Wiremold Type CRK Vanguard Duct.
2. Flexible duct shall be manufactured from fully annealed aluminum and formed into a
multiple corrugated construction, then encased with 1 inch, 3/4 IN density fiberglass
blanket and sheathed with a vinyl vapor barrier. The duct shall have an inside-bending
radius of not more than 3/4 inch I.D. It must comply with the latest NFPA Bulletin
90A and be listed as Class 1 air duct, UL Standard 181. Duct shall have published
pressure ratings of not less than 10 ft. S.A. positive pressure, .5 inch W.A. negative
HVAC 15600-10
44
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
so Smith College
Northampton,MA
metal screws shall be used on all exposed ductwork. Ducts shall be free from thumping or
rattling when fans are turned on or off.
D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or dimensions shall be made by the
HVAC Contractor without first obtaining approval from the Engineer, except that duct shall be
offset as required to clear structural members and to co-ordinate with other trades and any duct
changes must meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards.
► E. The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings shall be at least one and
one-half times the width of the duct. Where building conditions do not allow for this radius or
where square turns are shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal to Aero-Dyne or
Tuttle & Bailey shall be used in the supply or exhaust air ducts and "Sonotru" acoustical
attenuating turns as manufactured by South Control Products Co. shall be used in any air ducts
where acoustical insulation is included.
F. Duct sections 1'-6"wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with flat drive cleats 2-1/8"
wide. Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with duct and side cleats bent over to make a
tight joint. Standing bar slips as specified for ducts over 18" may be used at the HVAC
Contractor's option.
G. Ducts from 18"to 30"wide shall be jointed with 1/2"standing bar slips made of metal the same
as or heavier than duct sheets. Joints in ducts with either dimension over 30" shall have 1"
standing bar slips on those sides over 30". Where sides are over 42", the standing bar slips will
be reinforced with 1-1/2"x 1-1/2"x 1/8" angles. Additional angle stiffeners not over 60" apart
shall be provided between joints. Ducts over 60" in width shall be jointed with 1-1/2" x 1/8"
angle irons riveted to ductwork on all sides with 1/8"rivets at not more than 4-1/2" on centers,
sections bolted with 3/16"stove bolts at not over 6" centers, sheets turned over angles into joint
at least 1/4".
H. Sheet metal screws 3/4"#10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to ductwork to secure seams,
spaced not over 12" on centers and not less than two per side of 12" or more, except where
specified otherwise. Button punching shall not be used except for pre-erection attachment of
fittings.
I. Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each manual damper,
reheat coil, steam injection humidifier at each fire damper, and at every duct mounted control
device. Doors shall be equal to Buensod-Stacey Type S-2 of rigid construction with cast type
rotary latches. Where space limitations do not allow for full swing of the access door,two rotary
type latches shall be used. Doors located in insulated ducts shall be furnished with extended
frames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate doors located in insulated ductwork. All doors
shall be gasketed. Door shall be 12"by 12" minimum except where limited by duct width and
shall be larger where necessary for access to fire damper fusible links or other devices.
J. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft. in area or above shall be round bar type fastened to 1-
1/4"x 1-1/4"x 1/8" angles under the ducts. Ducts less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be hung with
black 1"x 1/16" strap iron bent 1" under bottom side of the duct and fastened to the duct with
sheet metal screws, using not less than two screws per side and as many more so that they are
not greater than 6"centers.
HVAC 15600-9
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ,
Northampton,MA
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the
installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All
work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and
patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is
not allowed without written approval by the Engineer. Location for openings, etc. shall be ..
checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other
divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall
make the corrections at his own expense.
B. All holes larger than 4"in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor.
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are
built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves
were not installed or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling
required for the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the
General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. •■
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner.
.W
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to
remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor
shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 9W
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1.
B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order
or by field conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work, fire dampers,volume dampers,
control dampers and control valves,and for piping installation,valve numbers shall be added to
these Drawings prior to submittal to the Engineer. In addition to the above all revised areas
shall be clearly marked with a revision bubble.
PART 2-MATERIALS
2.1 SHEET METALWORK
A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any ductwork. Above hung --
ceilings, duct locations and elevations must be co-ordinated with work of other trades to avoid
conflicts with structure,piping, conduit and light fixtures.
B. All sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet of bend forming quality.
C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest ASHRAE or SMACNA
requirements for metal gauges, joints, reinforcing and supports. All exposed ductwork shall be
constructed and hung to provide a neat, smooth, finished appearance. Cadmium plated sheet
HVAC 15600.8
40
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local
representative for each item of equipment.
D. See the "Automatic Temperature Control" paragraphs of this Section for additional
requirements.
1.16 PROTECTION
so A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other Sections
from damage by work or workmen,and shall include making good all damage thus caused.
OR B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested,and
accepted; protect work against theft, injury, or damage; and carefully store material and
equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with
M temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing or foreign
material.
C. Work under each Section includes receiving,unloading,uncrating, storing, protecting,setting in
place, and connecting-up completely any equipment supplied under each Section. Work under
each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and
fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures which are
missing or damaged by reason of mishandling or failure to protect on the part of the HVAC
Contractor.
D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather, vehicles,
dirt, and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical or absorbent
equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage.
40
1.17 CLEANING
A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush.all piping, ducts, and equipment of all foreign
substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly flush all piping of any
oils,burrs,solder,and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of cleaning.
B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in
operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no additional cost to
the Owner.
C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate
protection against the entrance of foreign matter.
D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon completion
of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish,
debris, and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas
caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean.
1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING
HVAC 15600-7
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
work and for repair to plaster,wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement
or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
C, Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be
considered as being defective.
1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owners
representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to
operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owners representative is properly
qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Contractor shall video tape
the instruction procedures and deliver three (3) copies of the tape with the Operation and
Maintenance Manuals.
B. Furnish the Engineer, for approval, three(3)copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL, the name and location of the equipment or the building, the
name of the Contractor,and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents
with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read,with
large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved
equivalent.
C. The manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of
equipment.
3. Winter/summer changeover procedures. "`
4. Schedule of adjustment,care,and routine maintenance for each item of equipment.
5. Lubrication chart.
6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of
each item of equipment.
7. Valve chart.
8. List of recommended spare parts.
9. Copies of all service contracts.
10. Performance curves for pumps, fans,etc. ..
ar
HVAC 15600-6
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
conditions,at no additional cost.
E. The HVAC Contractor shall consult the College's Temperature Control and Balancing
Contractor to coordinate work of these trades and to have a full comprehension of the work to
be done as well as to determine the conditions affecting the location and placement of all
!!!"' equipment and materials.
1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING
�s
A. Delivery: The HVAC Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures
to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his
to work and that of other trades. Delivery and storage of materials and equipment must be co-
ordinated with the Smith College Physical Plant, and is limited to areas designated by the
College.
B. Storage and Handling: The HVAC Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and
materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss,which may occur,shall be made good
a�. without expense to the Owner. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper
protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery,scaffolding,and transportation for completion of his Subcontract
shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60
cycle, single phase electric power from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light
40 his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs,sockets,etc.
C. All broken or waste material,rags,packing,etc.,resulting from his work shall be removed by the
HVAC Contractor.
1.13 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping and ductwork shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets,
and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms, unless specifically noted otherwise on the
44 Drawings.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure
above grade.
1.14 GUARANTEE
A. The HVAC Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a
period of one(1)year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to promptly repair or
replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period.
4
B. The HVAC Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his
HVAC 15600-5
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
for review and approval.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the
Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Engineer for review, making any and all
changes which may be required.
..a
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from any
obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and
Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the HVAC "
Contractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the
Specifications, the Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute
approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Engineer.
1.8 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall
be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the
proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance ..
of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or .A
sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1.
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall refer to all the Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and
structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the
Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied
thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements.
B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied,
in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or
reasonably implied in both. �.
C. The HVAC Contractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the
Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and
accessories that may be required. The HVAC Contractor shall carefully investigate the
structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly,
furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such
HVAC 15600-4
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs
shall be performed by the Contractor installing such items.
G. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials
from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own
expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all
times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means.
H. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this
Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials
and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Engineer
before proceeding with the work-
J. Before submitting his bid, the HVAC Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and
Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since
the HVAC Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard
thereto.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be
determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements. No substitution
will be allowed for the Trane,York, or McQuay air handling units and condensing unit,Trane,
McQuay or International fan coil units, Watts ball valves, Grundfos pumps, Tour and
Anderson balancing valves,Tunstall steam traps.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified
testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the
General Requirements.
1.6 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall be new, full weight,
and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that
portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for
each class or category of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for
which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall
conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the HVAC Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer six(6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all
details,dimensions,capacities,etc.of all materials to be furnished on the project. In addition to
the above,one(1)set of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the College's HVAC Department
HVAC 15600-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ..
Northampton,MA
shall be the property of the College and shall be delivered to such places designated by the
College. a.
1.3 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the MW
Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local
laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract
Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the ..
Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract
provisions shall govern unless the Engineer rules otherwise.
no
B. The HVAC Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'instructions at
no additional cost to the Owner.
no
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular aw
schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and
supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work.
..
B. The HVAC Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who
shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the HVAC
Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or
replaced without the express approval of the Engineer after construction work begins.
C. The HVAC Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the
execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to
the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the HVAC Contractor, it is agreed between the
Owner and the HVAC Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally
determined by the Engineer whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the
Contract for the work in question.
D. The HVAC Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to
expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials
as to sizes,locations,and means of support,to all other trades requiring such information. The
HVAC Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc.,
hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure
on the part of the HVAC Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required
to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit,wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is ,.
diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the
building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The HVAC
Contractor shall lay out all his work at the site and be responsible for the accuracy thereof.
Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements.
HVAC 15600-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
SECTION 15600-HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division
1, and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements,which affect work under this,
Section whether or not,such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section.
Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract.
�w
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the complete installation of all HVAC work specified herein and/or indicated on
the Drawings,including,but not limited to,the following;
1. Finned tube radiators.
2. Piping systems for hot water, supply and return, including pumps, heat exchanger valves,
and specialties.
3. Duct systems for and exhaust,including fire dampers,registers,louvers,and terminal boxes.
4. Exhaust fans.
5. Insulation for piping,ductwork,and equipment.
6. Energy management(building automation)system. All temperature control work shall be
by Yankee Technology,Inc.
7. Installation of and connection to equipment furnished by others.
8. Air and water balance, tests, startup. All water and air testing and balancing shall be
preformed by"Wings Testing and Balancing,Inc and billed directly to the College."
9. Guarantee.
10. Instructions.
11. Record Drawings.
4 12. Demolition, removal from site and legal disposal of all existing heating and ventilating
systems and equipment, made obsolete by new construction. All piping and equipment
HVAC 15600-1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
MW
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls,
mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms,
outdoor storage rooms,and receiving rooms.
B. Safing Insulation
1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or
Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length
and width, or as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as
manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal,over Thermafiber fire safing.
D. Preparation
1. At all fire rated assemblies,prepare all penetrations for pipes.
E. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size, leaving no voids. Compress and
friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing
compound.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING 15400-16
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil,waste,vent and water piping shall be tested by the Plumbing
Contractor and approved before acceptance. Underground piping shall be tested prior to
backfilling. Equipment required for tests shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner. All tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Local Plumbing
Inspector, and shall be performed as required by the Plumbing Code.
3.8 CLEANING UP
WX A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job, thoroughly
clean all fixtures installed under this Contract,removing all plaster, stickers, rust stains, and any
foreign matter or discoloration of fixtures, leaving every part in perfect condition and ready for
use.
3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
�w
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufacturers printed installation instructions,whether so shown on the Drawings or not,and
all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Plumbing
Contractor and be included in his Bid.
3.10 DISINFECTION
A. Flush out entire system.
B. Introduce chlorine or solution of calcium hypochlorite or sodium hypochlorite. Fill lines slowly
and apply agent at rate which will produce 50 parts per million of chloride as determined by
residual chlorine tests at end of lines. Open and close valves and hydrants while system is being
chlorinated.
C. After twenty-four (24)hours, test for residual chlorine. If more than 5 ppm are present, flush
out system until all traces are removed.
D. After disinfection, flush treated water from system through its extremities. Continue flushing
40 until samples of water are satisfactory to local authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat flushing if
samples taken daily over next three (3) days indicate that quality of water is not being
maintained. Do not draw samples from hydrants and un-disinfected hose.
E. Submit test results to Owner.
3.11 FIRE SAFING
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work
including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers.
PLUMBING 15400-15
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ,,..
Northampton, MA
3.3 WATER PIPE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs: Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be cut ..
accurately to measurements established at the building by the Plumbing Contractor and shall be
worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken structural
portions of the building. Above ground piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the
building unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top,
bottom or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or
installation conditions. Supply pipes,valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from
other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2" between finished covering on the
different services.
B. Expansion and Contraction of Pipe: Allowance shall be made throughout.for expansion and
contraction of pipe.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING •w
A. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of plumbing shall be performed by the
Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such ..
time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum.
B. Cutting of openings larger than those that can be drilled will be performed by the General
Contractor.
C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, will be performed by the r
General Contractor.
3.5 INSULATION
A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent Insulation Contractor regularly engaged in that
business.
B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls. Covering shall be applied before masonry
proceeds.
C. Insulation shall be applied over dean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed.
3.6 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS ••�
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. All water piping passing
through masonry walls shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe, or Schedule 40 PVC ..
pipe sleeves, inside diameter to be slightly larger than pipe passing through same. Center pipe
in sleeve.
B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where un insulated pipes pass through walls.
PLUMBING 15400-14
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 SOIL,WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING
A. Installation:
1. Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil, rain leaders and waste pipes shall have a
minimum grade of 1/4" per foot for piping 3" and less and 1/8" per foot for piping
larger than 3". Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more fixtures
40 shall be provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is noted.
2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil, waste, and drain lines shall be made with
go reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 45°
wyes, long or short sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, or 1/16 bends, or by a combination of
those or equivalent fittings. Single and double sanitary tees and 1/4 bends may be
,o used in drainage lines only where the direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical.
3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet side
of the traps. Use of bushings will not be permitted.
B. joints: Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees
will not be permitted. Threaded joints shall have American National taper pipe threads
conforming to National Bureau of Standards Handbook H28,with graphite or inert filler and
oil, with an approved graphite compound, or with polytetrafluorethylene tape applied to the
male threads.
32 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE
A. Bedding for the pipe shall provide full and stable support,with recesses excavated for pipe bells.
All pipe shall be laid to the specified line and grade, with a firm bearing throughout each
to length and with the bell ends uphill.
B. Pipe joints: The flexible water tight rubber gaskets shall be installed in accordance with the
directions of the manufacturer.
C. Plastic Pipe: Install plastic piping in accordance with manufacturers instructions. At
minimum,envelope all PVC pipe in 6" of screened gravel. Clear interior of conduit of dirt and
debris as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is
completed.
D. joint Adapters: Make joints between PVC pipe and other type of pipe with standard
manufactured PVC adapters and fittings.
E. Lay conduit beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated with
unbroken continuity of invert.
PLUMBING 15400-13
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ,..
Northampton, MA
G. Urinal (P-3A) Handicapped Access
1. Urinal to be same as P-2A, except mounted with rim of basin 15" above
finished floor.
2. Flush Valve-Sloan "Royal" No. 186-ADA with angle stop, vacuum breaker,
wall and spud flanges. `
3. Carrier-Zurn ZR-1222, plate type system with lower bearing plate.
H. Hose Bibb(P-4)
1. Woodford Model No. 24P,with vacuum breaker and loose key.
I. Mop Receptor(P-5)
1. Basin-Fiat No. 2424 molded stone, 24"x 24"x 10" high mop basin.
2. Faucet - T&S Faucet Model B-665-BSTR, heavy duty assembly with bottom ..
brace, 8" centers, rough chrome plate, provided with built-in stops, vacuum
breaker nozzle with pail hook and 3/a" hose thread on outlet.
3. Trim - Fiat No. 87A drain, No. 889CC mop hanger, No. 832AA hose and
bracket, and No. 1453-BB strainer.
J. Floor Drain(P-6)
1. Wade Model No. 1100 with FC7 strainer and 1/z"trap primer connection.
2.10 TRAP PRIMER
A. Furnish and install all brass automatic trap primers for all floor drains. Primer shall include
automatic pressure activated brass valve with vacuum breaker, and copper duplex manifold
distribution reservoir. Valve shall conform with A.S.S.E.Standard 1018.
B. Valve shall be Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.,or equal.
2.11 DEMOLITION
A. Removal of all obsolete fixtures, drains, piping, etc., not to be re-used shall be removed by this ..
Contractor and shall become the property of the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall
be responsible for delivering and/or properly disposing of all obsolete equipment to such places
as designated by the Owner.
PLUMBING 15400-12
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
go Smith College
Northampton, MA
+0 1. Closet - American Standard "Madera" Model 2234.015, elongated vitreous china,
siphon jet action with 1 1/z"top spud and 1.6 gallon flush, floor mounted toilet.
as 2. Flush Valve-Sloan"Royal" 111 YO with 1" angle stop,vacuum breaker,wall and spud
flanges.
3. Seat-Church Model 9400KNSSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front seat,
less cover,with self-sustaining hinge.
4. Mounting to be floor mounted with bee's wax seal
D. Water Closet(P-1A)Handicapped
4
1. Closet - American Standard "Madera" 17"H Model 3043.102, elongated vitreous
china,siphon jet action with 1 1/z"top spud and 1.6 gallon flush,floor mounted toilet.
2. Flush Valve-Sloan"Royal" 111 YO ADA with 1"angle stop,vacuum breaker,wall and
spud flanges.
3. Seat-Church Model 9400KNSSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front seat,
less over,with self-sustaining hinge.
4. Mounting to be floor mounted with bees wax seal.
E. Lavatory(P-2)Handicapped
1. Basin - laminated lavatories are to be furnished and installed by the General
Contractor. Furnish and Install the supply and waste piping and fittings.
2. Supply Fitting - S-60-G-H Symmons Scot metering faucet, 4" center, self-closing
with temperature adjustment, temperature limit stops, time limit stop with flow,
blade handle and grid strainer, Brass Craft No. CS400A stops and risers.
3. Fittings - Provide chrome plated offset "P" trap with cleanout and tailpiece offset
with loose key stops, and insulate all drains and stops with "Truebro Handi Lav
Guard" molded vinyl insulation.
F. Urinal(P-3)
1. Urinal - American Standard "Washbrook" No. 6501.010 vitreous china,
wall hung fixture with washout flushing action.
2. Flush Valve - Sloan "Royal" No. 186 with angle stop, vacuum breaker, wall
and spud flanges.
�w
3. Carrier-Zurn ZR-1222, plate type system with lower bearing plate.
PLUMBING 15400-11
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College MM
Northampton, MA
B. Fittings shall be insulated with mitered cut insulation applied over fittings with joints taped.
Cold water piping shall also have mastic applied to all overlapping surfaces to form a vapor
barrier.
C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer's .�
recommendations. Any gaps or fishmouths shall be remade.
D. Install a twelve (12") inch length of wood blocking at each hanger; insulation shall run ..
continuous through the hanger. jacket shall match adjacent insulation jacket.
E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories shall be insulated with Truebro
"Handi Lav-Guard",or equal,molded insulation kit.
2.7 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
SC-Series type shock absorbers, sizes as shown on Drawings, or as required. No substitutions
will be allowed.
2.8 ACCESS PANELS
A. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves, balancing fittings, or cleanouts in
masonry walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard walls or ceilings, shall be furnished by the ,..
Plumbing Contractor and installed by tradesmen of wall or ceiling finish. Access panels in
plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL(12"x 12" min.); in walls, shall be Karp type
DSC-214M"Universal" (12"x 12"); for drywall ceilings, shall be Karp Sesame Slim Trim Access
Hatches,Type KSTDW/CAD(12"x 12"min.)with screw driver type lock.
B. Access panels shall be Karp Associates, Inc., Inryco, Inc., Milcor Division, Birmingham
Ornamental Iron,or equal.
2.9 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS
A. General Requirements: Reference made herein to numbers of plumbing fixtures to establish
type and quality of materials. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or
concealed type of lock shield, loose key pattern stops for supplies shall be furnished and
installed with fixtures. Exposed traps and supply pipes for all fixtures and equipment shall be
chrome plated and connected to the rough piping systems at the wall. Wall escutcheons shall
be chromium plated or nickel plated brass with polished,bright surfaces. -�
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc. for proper installation
of all fixtures requiring support. They shall be in accordance with the manufacturers ..
recommendations, and, if necessary, shall be built into place as the building progresses. This
Contractor shall be held responsible for the stability and proper support of all plumbing fix-
tures.
C. Water Closet(P-1)
PLUMBING 15400-10
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
H. Globe valves shall be as manufactured by Hammond IB-418 or IB-440.
2.3 HANGERS
A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company,Carpenter& Paterson, Fee& Mason,
or equal.
B. For cast iron pipe-Grinnell Fig. 260, one to each length of cast iron pipe; at twelve foot(12')
intervals for threaded piping.
40 C. For hot, cold, and return water piping - Grinnell Fig. 70 at six foot (6') intervals for copper
tubing 1-1/4" or less; ten foot (10') intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger. Install Fig. 167
insulation shield between hanger and insulation. Hangers to be installed outside the insulation.
40 Hangers for gas piping shall be installed at eight foot(8')intervals.
D. Hangers or supports shall be placed within one foot(1')of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs
40 of pipe not over five feet(5)in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 1/2" from
the elbow on the connecting horizontal run.
40 2.4 TRAPS
A. Traps at fixtures shall be as listed in the Fixture Schedule. Exposed traps shall be chrome plated.
'n B. Traps and running traps shall be extra heavy cast iron where buried in floors or serving floor
drains. Where traps are not connected directly under the drain they serve in the floor, they shall
be fitted with top cleanouts and extensions to the floor with access covers and plates.
4F
C. Furnish and install traps as required for all items of equipment furnished under other Sections of
these Specifications,and/or by the Owner.
2.5 CLEANOUTS
A. Where cleanouts occur in finished floors throughout the building, they shall be Zurn ZN-1405-
2, nickel-bronze for concrete finish floor; Zurn ZN-1405-7 nickel-bronze recessed for resilient
floors; Zurn ZN-1405-7 for ceramic tile floors; ZN-1405-14 for carpeted floors; or equal by J. R.
Smith or Wade.
2.6 INSULATION
A. All water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex closed cell pipe insulation with self-sealing lap,
1" thick for hot water,and return hot water 1/2" thick for cold water. Insulation shall be one
piece snap-on type. All exposed piping within 10'-0"of finished floor shall be insulated as noted
above and shall be fully jacketed with a PVC cover.
PLUMBING 15400-9
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ..,
Northampton, MA
2.2 BALL VALVES ..
A. On water lines inside the building,ball valves shall be as manufactured by Watts Series B6001.
No substitutions will be allowed. Valves shall be provided with stainless steel ball, reinforced
teflon seats and seals, bronze body, 400 psi wog, positive 100% shut-off. All valves to be
furnished with valve handle extension sized to match pipe insulation thickness.
B. Drain valves at all low points shall be 1/2" or 3/4" solder by 3/4" hose end with attached cap
and chain.
go
C. Gate Valves:
1. Where indicated on the Drawings, all gate valves 4"and larger, shall be Class 125 iron
body bronze mounted with body and bonnet conforming to 200 psi wog non-shock
cast iron, flanged ends, with Teflon packing, two-piece packing gland assembly,
Hammond Figure 1R1138,Stockman,or equal. �*
2. Valves 3" and smaller where indicated on the Drawings shall be Class 125. Body and
bonnets shall be of ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, solid disc, copper silicone •
alloy stem,brass packing gland,Teflon packing, and malleable handwheel, solder end,
Stockham Figure B-104, Hammond 1R1138,or equal.
3. Valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham,Hammond,American Valve,or equal.
D. Balancing Valves: s
1. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install balance circuit setter, with
calibrated scale, with bronze body and disc and connections for differential pressure
meter.
2. Balancing valves shall be Tour&Anderson.
E. Check Valves
1. Check valves shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Drawings.
Checks up to 2" shall be Class 125. Solder ends, body and caps shall be ASTM B62
cast bronze composition,swing type disc,Stockham Figure B-309.
2. Check valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted with body and cap
conforming to ASTM A126, Class B cast iron, flanged, swing type disc, Stockham
Figure G-931.
3. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham,Jenkins,Lunkenheimer,or equal.
G. Vacuum relief valves shall be Watts Model 36A-3/4".
PLUMBING 15400-8
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
6. Valve chart.
7. List of recommended spare parts.
8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. Performance curves for pumps, etc.
10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the
local representative for each item of equipment.
1.17 GUARANTEE
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a
period of one (1)year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or
replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period.
t B. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his
work and for repair to plaster,wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement
or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
wA
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be
considered as being defective.
1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Project Closeout,Section 01700.
PART 2,PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. All soil,waste, and vent piping in accessible areas 2-1/2" and larger, shall be cast iron"no hub",
ASA Group 022 pipe and fittings, joined with cast iron clamps as manufactured by "Clamp-
All". No substitutions will be allowed. All soil, waste, and vent below slab shall be service
t® weight, cast iron pipe with oakum and lead, sealed gas and watertight. In lieu of lead and
oakum joint piping,below slab may be service weight with push-on rubber rings.
40
B. In lieu of cast iron piping, pipe sizes 3" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper pipe with solder
fittings.
C. All waste lines 2" and smaller shall be Type "M copper. All vent lines 2" and smaller shall be
type "M" copper. Minimum vent line size below ground shall be 2". Minimum vent terminal
through roof shall be 4". Vent flashing at the roof shall be by roofing Contractor.
D. All hot and cold water piping within the building shall be hard copper Type"L"seamless drawn
tubing, assembled with sweat fittings. All solders used shall be lead free, cadmium free,
"Silberbrite-100", or equal, complying with the latest issue of ANSI A-5.8 publications. All
exposed runs to all toilet fixtures and sinks shall be chrome plated.
PLUMBING 15400-7
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Plumbing Contractor shall do all drilling
required for the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the
General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. �.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner.
wA,
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to
remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Plumbing Contractor
shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner.
1.15 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping, hangers and supports shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms,
closets,and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure
above grade, unless specifically so shown on the Drawings. When pipes are indicated to be
installed in exterior walls, the Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that wall .
and pipe insulation is properly installed to protect them from freezing.
1.16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's
representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to
operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly
qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Subcontractor shall video
tape the instruction procedures an deliver two (2) copies of the tape with the Operation and
Maintenance Manuals.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and
Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of
the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with
tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with
large sheets of drawings folded in. the manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved
equivalent.
C. The Manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems. ,,1B
2. Description of start-up,operation,and shutdown.
3. Schedule of adjustment,care,and routine maintenance for each item of equipment.
4. Lubrication chart.
5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of
each item of equipment.
PLUMBING 15400-6
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
delaying his work and that of other trades. All delivery and storage must be coordianted with
the Smith College Physical Plant Department. The Plumbing Contractor shall take delivery of
all pre-purchased plumbing fixtures and equipment, and shall be responsible for the proper
handling, storage, and protection of these materials from that point on. Any damage or loss of
these materials after delivery shall be the responsibility of this Contractor.
B. Storage and Handling: The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and
materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good
without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper
protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract
shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt,
60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and
40 light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs,sockets,etc.
C. All broken or waste material,rags,packing,etc.,resulting from his work shall be removed by the
Plumbing Contractor.
1.13 PROTECTION
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or
loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the
Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his
materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
40 1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the
installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All
work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and
patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is
not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be
checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other
divisions shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor failing to co-ordinate,who shall
make the corrections at his own expense.
B. All holes larger than 4' in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor.
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are
built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves
PLUMBING 15400-5
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College MM
Northampton, MA
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing Contractor from „s
any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and
Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Plumbing
Contractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the
Specifications, the Plumbing Contractor will be required to remove such materials and sub-
stitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He
shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the
proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance
of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS ..�
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or
sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Section 01500.
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans,
elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to
supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work
indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements.
B. The Specifications complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans
and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably
implied in both.
C. The Plumbing Contractor shall not scale the Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and
accessories that may be required. The Plumbing Contractor shall carefully investigate the struc-
tural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly,
furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such
conditions, at no additional cost. ..
1.11 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: The Plumbing subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and
fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid
PLUMBING 15400-4
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs
shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items.
G. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at
his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged
at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means.
H. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under
this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. The Plumbing Contractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications before
ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the
attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be
determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that
substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the
product specification,and as approved by the Architect and Owner.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified
testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the
General Requirements.
40
1.6 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise,all materials used shall be U.S. made,
new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function
properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of
manufacturer for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of
types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels
shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Plumbing Contractor shall submit to the
Architect six(6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all
details,dimensions,capacities,etc.of all materials to be furnished.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the
Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all
changes which may be required.
PLUMBING 15400-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College �•
Northampton, MA
1.3 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local
laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract
Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the
Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract
provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'instructions
at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular
schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and
supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who
shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Plumbing
Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or
replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins.
C. The Plumbing Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from the
execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to
the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Plumbing Contractor, it is agreed between
the Owner and the Plumbing Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally
determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the
Contract for the work in question.
D. The Plumbing Contractor shall coordinate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to
expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials
as to sizes,locations, and means of support,to all other trades requiring such information. The
Plumbing Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc.,
hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure
on the part of the Plumbing Contractor to give proper information as above,he will be required
to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit,wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is
diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the
building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Plumbing ..►
Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at
the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements.
PLUMBING 15400-2
MR
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
,P Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 15400-PLUMBING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of
Division 1,as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section.
Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the complete installation of all plumbing work specified herein and/or indicated
on the Drawings, including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Sanitary waste and venting systems inside the building, connecting to existing drainage
systems within the building. Furnish piping,traps, flanges, seals, cleanouts, fixtures, drains,
supports,and roof terminals.
2. Water service and sanitary sewer connecting to existing lines within the building or on site.
3. Hot, cold and return hot water distribution systems. Furnish piping, fittings, insulation,
supports,valves,water heater,and pump.
4. Plumbing fixtures and supports.
5. Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing.
6. All final connections to all items of equipment famished by others requiring water, gas,
drain,and waste connections.
7. The disconnecting and removal of all existing piping systems, fixtures, and equipment
interfering with, or made obsolete by, new construction. All piping, fixtures, and
equipment (i.e. copper and brass piping, fittings and valves, flush valves, mixing valves,
water heaters and pumps, heat exchangers, and controls) to be removed is the property of
the Owner and shall be delivered to such places designated by the Owner. Removal from
the site of all obsolete material after the Owners review shall be by this Contractor.
B. Refer to appropriate Division- 2 Sections for trenching and backfill required in conjunction
with plumbing piping;not work of this Section.
w�
PLUMBING 15400-1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Identification: Apply signs to control, drain, test, and alarm valves identifying there purpose
and function. Provide lettering size and style selected by Architect/Engineer from NFPA's
suggested styles.
B. Adjustments: Place the system in operation with controls functioning. Adjust controls and
apparatus for proper operation. Test thermometers and gauges for accuracy over the entire
range. Remove and replace items found defective.
no
END OF SECTION
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-20
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturers written instructions for rigid
systems.
F. Make connections between underground and above ground piping using an approved transition
piece strapped or fastened to prevent separation.
G. Install sleeve at pipe penetrations in basement and foundation walls. Refer to Division 15
Section,"Basic Materials and Methods".
H. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with shutoff
valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes.
I. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gauge
with a connection not less than 1/4" and having a soft metal seated globe valve arranged for
draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal and where they will
not be subject to freezing.
W J. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join
pipe,fittings,and valves as follows.
K Flanged Joints: Align flanged surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening
to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable
lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque
specified by the bolt manufacturer.
L. Mechanical Grooved Joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with
the couplings.
M. End Treatment:After cutting pipe lengths,remove burrs and fins from pipe ends.
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance with the
manufacturers written instructions,NFPA 13 and 14,and the authority having jurisdiction.
B. Gate Valves: Install supervised open gate valves so located to control all sources of water supply
except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control valve, provide
permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each
valve.
C. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position in proper direction of flow including
the bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection. Install valve trim in
accordance with the valve manufacturer's appropriate trim diagram. Test valve for proper
operation.
3.5 FINAL CLOSEOUT
w
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-19
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls,
mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, and machine
rooms.
B. Safing Insulation
1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or
Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length
and width, or as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as
manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc.,or approved equal,over Thermafiber fire safing.
D. Preparation .•
1. At all fire rated assemblies,prepare all penetrations for pipes and perimeters.
E. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and
friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing
compound.
3. Install fire safing around all pipe penetrations and sleeves passing through fire walls,
ceilings, floors,etc.
3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and aw
reductions in pipe sizes.
C. Install unions in pipes 2" and smaller adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on ..
flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings.
D. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 and larger
connections.
E. Hangers and Supports:Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hanger and
support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-18
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
a. Upright sprinkler heads shall be Reliable Corp., Model "M" standard upright
sprinkler head, rough brass. Temperature rating 165°F or as required by the
insurance underwriter.
b. Semi-recessed dry pendant sprinkler heads shall be Reliable Model "M" chrome
plated head with Type "F-1" recessed escutcheon, rated at 165°F unless otherwise
noted;to be installed in all occupied spaces.
c. Head guards shall be equal to Reliable Model 1 for upright sprinklers in areas
specified on drawings.
d. Horizontal sidewall sprinkler heads shall be Reliable Model "E" with white
finish, temperature 165°F unless noted otherwise
e. Dry horizontal sidewall shall be equal to Reliable Model H-1, 1"NPT, 165°F.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING
A. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains,lead-in connections and
control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler-piping installation has been completed
and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove
foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSVNFPA 13. Continue flushing until
water is clear,and check to ensure that debris has not dogged sprinklers.
B. After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at not less
40 than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is
in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low
point of each system of zone being tested. Test dry-pipe hydrostatically except, in freezing condi
'0 tions, test with air at pressures not less than 50 psi, for period of 2 hours. Check system for
leakage. Leave differential dry-valve clappers open during test,to prevent damage.
C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with
ANSVNFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate
compliance. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair
methods.
3.2 FIRE SAFING
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work
including,but not limited to the following:
1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers, including all penetrations through
existing plaster ceiling for the installation of Attic sprinklers.
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-17
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
a. Unless otherwise indicated,provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.
b. Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem,for valves other than quarter-turn.
2. Gate Valves
a. Threaded End, 2" and Smaller: FM, UL-listed, 175 psi, bronze body, solid
wedge,outside screw and yoke,rising stem.
Crane: 459
Fairbanks: 0222
Hammond: IB681 ..s
Jenkins: 275U
Stockham: B-133
Walworth: 904 a+
b. Flanged End, 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, UL listed, 175 psi, iron body bronze
mounted,solid wedge, outside screw and yoke,rising stem.
Crane: 467
Fairbanks: 0412
Hammond: IR1154
Jenkins: 825-A
Stockham: G-634
Walworth: 8713-F
3. Check Valves
a. 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, renewable
composition disc and bronze seat ring,bolted cover,flanged ends.
Fairbanks: 0711
Jenkins: 729
Stockham: G-940 --
Walworth: 8883-LT
4. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including •�
valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as
to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary.
5. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case
with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable.
F. Fire Protection Specialties
1. Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the following listing.
Provide sizes and types,which mate and match piping and equipment connections.
.W
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-16
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
C. C Clamps: MSS Type 23.
d. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27.
e. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one of the
following:
low
B-Line Systems Inc.
Carpenter and Patterson,Inc.
Corner&Lada Co., Inc.
Elcen Metal Products Co.
l° Fee&Mason Mfg.Co.
ITT Grinnell Corp.
5. Install building attachments at required locations on structural steel for proper piping
support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated on MSS
SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional
concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at
changes in direction of piping.
6. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from
building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of
horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible.
Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of
various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest
pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or
perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.
7. Support sprinkler piping independently of other piping.
► 8. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to
permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate action of expan-
sion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.
9. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide pipe slopes and so that maximum
pipe deflections allowed to ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded.
10. Hanger Adjustments:Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments.
E. Valves
1. Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service
indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper
selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide
end connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections.
Where more than one type is indicated,selection is Installer's option.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-15
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
b. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe escutcheons of one of
the following: ow
Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co.
Producers Specialty&Mfg.Co.
Sanitary-Dash Mfg.Co. am
C. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls,
partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior
of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe so escutcheon covers penetration hole,
and is flush with adjoining surface.
D. Supports,Anchors, and Seals
1. Provide factory-fabricated piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58, of �.
one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit.piping systems, in
accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturers published product information. Use
only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and
supports to exactly fit pipe size.
a. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1, for piping larger than 4".
b. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7,for piping 4"and less.
.w
C. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8.
2. Provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one
of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal piping hangers
and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturers published
product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service.
Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods.
a. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13.
b. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15.
C. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. .•
d. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17.
3. Provide factory-fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of
the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in
accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturers published product information. Select .w
size of building attachments to suit hanger rods.
a. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19.
.r
b. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-14
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
G. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and
equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform
compression of gaskets.
H. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making grooves in
pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
fff I. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare for
application of specified coatings(if any).
J. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test each natural section
of each piping system independently, but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections
where test pressures exceed valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for
indicated pressure and time.
1. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:
a. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe;remove burrs.
b. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below
grade,or in exterior walls,caulked between sleeve and pipe.
C. Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls,
floors, ceilings and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members
of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect. Install
sleeves so that piping will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance
for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run.
Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of surface; except floor sleeves.
Extend floor sleeves 1/4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish
sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of
concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to
prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves.
d. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following:
Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe with oakum,
caulk with lead,on both sides.
2. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe
outside diameter or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside
diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe sleeve and extension, if any. Furnish
pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas; prime paint finish
for unoccupied areas.
a. Pipe Escutcheons for all areas: Provide chrome plated sheet steel escutcheons,
solid or split hinged.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-13
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College aw
Northampton, MA
B. Piping above ground and within the building shall conform to all requirements of NFPA 13
and shall be as follows: AW
1. Exposed sprinkler piping, subject to vandalism (stair halls and similar areas), shall be
Schedule 40 black steel pipe,welded,suitable for 175 psi.working water pressure.
2. All concealed piping and all exposed sprinkler piping in Mechanical Equipment
Rooms 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be at the option of the Fire Protection Subcontractor,
either Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings or standard weight roll
grooved pipe with grooved fittings.
3. All exposed sprinkler piping, 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe
with screwed fittings.
4. Schedule 40 seamless red brass pipe with brass screwed fittings suitable for 175 psi.
working water pressure.
5. Type "L" seamless drawn hard copper tubing with solder-joint pressure fittings, where
noted on the drawings.
C. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will
achieve permanently leak proof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service
without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings,but with adequate
and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment.
Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connec-
tions,within 1/16"misalignment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.
D. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated,vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) w.
and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and
column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not
otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block
access for servicing building and its equipment.
Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and
permanent-enclosure elements of building. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces,
conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or
above suspended ceilings;do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions,except as indicated. pow
E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults, Elevator Machine
Room, and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. oft
Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces. Any piping intended
to be run through electrical spaces shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to installation.
MW
F. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream
threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compounder
pipe joint tape (Teflon)where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at am
each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.
we
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-12
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
oft Basement Renovations
mo Smith College
Northampton, MA
go (1) Coupling Housings:Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47.
(2) Coupling Housing:Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536.
(3) Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which
engages grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an electrometric
gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast in two or more
r parts, secure together during assembly with nuts and bolts. Permit
degree of contraction and expansion as specified in manufacturers
latest published literature.
go
(4) Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so
that internal pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of
elastomers having properties as designated by ASTM D 2000.
(5) Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183, minimum
tensile 110,000-psi.
(6) Branch Stub Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid
positioning engaging machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing elastomeric
gasket conforming to pipe outside diameter around hole, and lower
housing with positioning lugs, secured together during assembly with
nuts and bolts.
(7) Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved
mechanical couplings.
Malleable Iron:ASTM A 47.
Ductile Iron:ASTM A 536.
(8) Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt
hole alignment.
Malleable Iron:ASTM 47.
Ductile Iron:ASTM A 536.
far
(9) Grooves: Conform to the following:
Standard Steel:Square cut.
Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved.
(10) Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
grooved piping products of the following:
ITT Grinnell Corp.
a Victaulic Co.
air
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-11
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College .,.F
Northampton, MA
C. Submit valve schedule for piping system, typewritten and reproduced on
8-1/2"x 11"bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbre-
viation(as shown on tag), location of valve(room or space), and variations for
identification(if any). Mark valves,which are intended for emergency shut-off
and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. In addition
to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified .w
in Division 1.
d. For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame,with screws for
removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames
of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum,with SSB-grade sheet glass.
e. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in rooms where indicated or, if
not otherwise indicated,where directed by Architect.
f. Furnish complete chart and flow diagram of entire system listing the valve
number, fluid controlled, and zone reference location for all valves corre-
sponding to the tag numbers. The chart shall be framed under glass and hung �►
in the Fire Protection Equipment Room where directed. Furnish two(2) extra
copies of the chart to the Architect.
aw
g. Furnish and install a laminated red phenolic plate with engraved white
lettering for each zone control flow switch and isolation valve. Nameplates
shall be located adjacent to all exposed and concealed valves, approximately r,
12"below finished ceiling.
2.2 PIPE,TUBE,AND FITTINGS
A. Interior Piping
1. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,A 106 or A 120: except comply with ASTM A 53 or A
106 where close coiling or bending is required.
a. Pipe Weight:Schedule 40. aw
b. Fittings: Class 125,cast-iron threaded,ANSI B 16.4,or flanged,ANSI B 16.1.
00
C. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; cut-groove type for
piping 2-1/2"and larger only.
r
(1) Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe:ASTM A 135.
(2) Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 5" and smaller; 0.134" wall thickness
for 6".
(3) Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll groove
or mechanical locking type.
d. Grooved Piping Products(for use on pipes 2.1/2"and larger)
tee►
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-10
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings,
temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection
as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types
matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials, which match pipe
materials used in fire protection piping systems. Where more than one type of material or
product is indicated,selection is Installer's option.
B. Basic Identification
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification materials
of one of the following:
Allen Systems,Inc.
Brady(W. H.)Co.,Signmark Div.
Industrial Safety Supply Co.,Inc.
Seton Name Plate Corp.
2. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, color-coded pipe
markers,complying with ANSI A13.1.
a. For external diameters less than 6", provide full-band pipe markers, extending
360°around pipe at each location, fastened as follows:
Snap-on application of pre-tensioned,semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.
b. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature, which best
describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect.
C. Locate pipe markers as follows:
(1) Near each valve and control device.
(2) Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping
run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and
equipment.
(3) Branch piping need not be marked.
3. Provide manufacturers standard solid brass valve tags with printed enamel lettering,
with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16" high letters and sequenced
valve numbers approximately 3/8" high, and with 5/32"hole for fastener. Provide tags
on all valves and control devices.
a. Provide 1-1/8" sq.brass tags with black lettering.
b. Provide manufacturers standard solid brass chain(wire link or beaded type),
or solid brass Shooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to
valves,and manufactured specifically for that purpose.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-9
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
protection lines, valves, and zone flow switches. All changes must be clearly marked with a
bubble drawn around the area of work effected by the change.
C. Coordination of Trades
me
1. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall give full co-operation to the Subcontractors of
other trades, and shall furnish any information necessary to permit the work of all
trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay.
2. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this Subcontractor
shall prepare composite sketches at a suitable scale, not less than 1/4" = 1'-0", clearly
showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. mb`
3. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible problem
areas by this Subcontractor without first coordinating the installation of same with '"
other trades and the Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own expense, shall relocate
all uncoordinated piping and other equipment installed should they interfere with the
proper installation and mounting of electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceil- aw
ings,and other structural finishes installed by other trades.
4. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment in 0W
hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts
shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before the piping
and/or equipment of other trades is installed. ow
5. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use
common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways,
piping, ductwork and other materials, this Subcontractor must plan and locate the
positions of equipment to be furnished under this Section so that all items including
piping and/or equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space
available. Location and positioning shall be done prior to installation of same and to
the satisfaction of the Architect.
6. This Subcontractor,before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with XM
the clearances required for finished columns,pilasters,partitions or walls, as shown on
the Contract Architectural or Structural Drawings showing foundations, floor plans,
roof plans,and details. aw
7. Piping work that is installed under this Contract, which interferes with the
architectural design or building structure, shall be changed as directed by the Architect, ..
and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no
additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2-MATERIALS
2.1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-8
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with
large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved
equivalent.
C. The Manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
4W 2. Description of startup,operation,and shutdown.
3. Schedule of adjustment,care,and routine maintenance for each item of equipment.
4. Lubrication chart.
5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of
each item of equipment.
�. 6. Valve chart.
7. List of recommended spare parts.
8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. Performance curves for pumps,etc.
10. Lists of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the
local representative for each item of equipment.
1.16 GUARANTEE
+ ! A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all
parts for a period of one(1)year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly
repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by
defects in his work and for repair to plaster,wood, and other materials or equipment caused by
replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be
considered as being defective.
1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Refer to Division 1 for Record Drawings.
B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order
or by field conditions. Principal dimensions shall be indicated of concealed work, fire
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-7
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
B. The Specifications and Plans are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied,
in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or e,,,
reasonably implied in both.
C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall not scale the drawings.
o
D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and
accessories that may be required. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall carefully investigate
the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work according-
ly, furnishing such fittings,traps,offsets,valves,and accessories as may be required to meet such
conditions,at no additional cost.
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and
equipment to the building site when required,so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid
delaying his work and that of other trades.
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract
shall be provided by the Fire Protection Subcontractor.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain M.
120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his
machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs,sockets,etc.
C. All broken or waste material,rags,packing,etc.,resulting from his work shall be removed by the
individual Subcontractor.
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping shall be installed exposed except where piping is to be installed above new acoustic
ceilings. Where ceilings are installed sprinklers shall be installed above and below the ceiling.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure
above grade.
1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owners re- ..,
presentative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to
operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly
qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. MW
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and am
Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of
the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-6
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial re-
lationship between piping and proximate equipment.
1. Shop Drawings are subject to review and will require approval by Owner's insurer's
rating organization (IRI Incorporated)and the Northampton Fire Department prior to
'► submitting to the Architect for approval.
2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings thoroughly for
compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect
for review,making any and all changes,which may be required.
► 3. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Fire Protection
Subcontractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the
Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in shop drawings
shall remain with the individual Subcontractor.
4. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which shop
..r drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with
the Specifications,the Fire Protection Subcontrac for will be required to remove
such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by
the Architect.
5. Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work,which indicates that
work has been tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13, and also that system is
ON operational,complete, and has no defects.
1.9 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work
He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to
the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the
observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or
sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1.
1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details,
plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his Bid. These documents are intended to
supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work in-
dicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-5
..A
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
place. In case of failure on the part of the Fire Protection Subcontractor to give proper
information,as above,he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit,wire and cable indicated on the drawings is
diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the
building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs,bends, offsets,etc. aw
F. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy
thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. In no
case shall piping be installed laterally in thickness of slab or deck
G. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs
shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. All piping shall be installed
concealed in finished spaces. *�*
H. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work
and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury aw
at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or
plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable
means.
I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed
under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. ..
J. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications
and shall field verify all existing conditions before ordering any materials and the installation of
work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with
the work.
1.7 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made,
new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function
properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of
manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of
types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels
shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
1.8 SUBMITTALS am
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall submit to
the Architect eight (8) sets of catalogue cuts or manufacturers' data sheets, giving all details,
dimensions,capacities,etc.of all materials to be furnished.
B. Submit hydraulic calculations and scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings
including,but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, elevations and slopes of
.w
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-4
w
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
to Smith College
Northampton, MA
40 H. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be
determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that
substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the
product specification.
09
I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a
qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with
the General Requirements.
1.5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
MR,
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local
laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract
Documents conflict with any codes,rules or regulations,the latter shall govern.
Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the
Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' in-
structions at no additional cost to the Owner. Review proposed system with said officials prior
to commencing work.
1.6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a
regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care
" and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the
Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Fire
Protection Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be
removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work
auw begins.
C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to
the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors'work resulting from the
execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to
the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Fire Protection Subcontractor, it is agreed
4W between the Owner and the Fire Protection Subcontractor that such liability and extent of
damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding
on both parties to the Contract for the work in question.
WX D. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in
order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his
materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such infor-
"n mation. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams,
supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ,„,w,
Northampton, MA
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform a water flow test, and with this information,
shall calculate pipe sizes and sprinkler head configuration and orifice sizes in accordance with ,,t,,
NFPA 13.
B. Sprinkler head and pipe run locations, as shown on the drawings, are to be interpreted as
diagrammatic only. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall produce a design based on actual .�
available water pressure and submit it to the Architect for approval before beginning fabrication
and installation.
so
C. Design Criteria: Pipe sizing and sprinkler head layout shown on the drawings is provided to in-
dicate a suggested pipe routing, zoning, and sprinkler head location, and shall not be used for
estimating purposes. Location of piping and heads shall be co-ordinated with all other trades.
Actual pipe sizing, types of heads, and layout shall be based on a hydraulically designed system
in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13, the Northampton Fire Department, and the
Insurance Underwriter (I.R.I.). Location of sprinkler heads, in relation to the ceiling light
hazard occupancy. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall prepare working drawings and
hydraulic calculations per NFPA 13 and shall obtain Northampton Fire Department and the
Colleges Insurance Underwriter approval prior to start of work. The Fire Protection ...
Subcontractor shall perform water flow tests or obtain water flow data in writing from local
authority. Co-ordinate work of this Section with all trades to avoid interference with ductwork,
HVAC and plumbing, piping, electrical work, structure, etc. Final sprinkler head locations
shall be subject to Architect's approval.
The number of heads and pipe sizes may be increased or reduced due to hydraulic calculations
or the installation of revised heads, provided the revised heads are UL listed and F.M. approved
and meet NFPA 13,Northampton Fire Department, and(IRI)Insurance Underwriters criteria.
Additionally, all heads shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 recommendations. .
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection piping systems pro-
ducts, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than five(5)years.
B. NFPA Code:Comply with ANSI/NFPA 13,"Installation of Sprinkler System'.
C. FM Compliance:Comply with Factory Mutual"Approval Guide". �*
D. FM Labels:Provide sprinkler products bearing FM approval labels.
E. UL Labels: Provide fire sprinkler piping products, which have been approved and labeled by
Underwriters Laboratories.
F. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing regulations pertaining to
fire sprinkler piping. Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work.
G. Final installation of system is subject to approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization and
local Fire Department.
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-2
40 Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
w Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 15300-FIRE PROTECTION
`-0 PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
o
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division
1,and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements,which affect work under this,
Section whether or not,such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section.
Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and reasonably incidental
to,the complete installation of all fire protection work specified herein and/or indicated on the
drawings,including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Renovations to the existing dry pipe automatic sprinkler system. System shall be installed
in all spaces, unless otherwise noted, including renovation to existing building sprinkler
system.
2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish all labor and materials required for his own
hoisting,rigging,and scaffolding during the entire course of the project.
3. Disconnect and remove all existing sprinkler heads and piping made obsolete by or
interfering with new construction.
4. Submit plans and calculations to the colleges Insurance Underwriter (IRI Insurance
40 company C/o HSB Industrial Risk Insurers, 85 Woodland Street, PO Box 5010, Hartford
Ct.(Attn:Mr. David M.Goush)for review and approval.
+o B. Related work, to be performed under other sections of his Specification shall include the
following:
1. Wiring of flow switches,tamper switches, electric bell and control panel back to the fire
alarm panel shall be by the Electrical Subcontractor, coordinated and as directed by the
Fire Protection Subcontractor.
2. Cutting and patching.
1.3 SYSTEM DESIGN
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
3. Length: 30 inches(750 mm).
4. Shelf: 0.05-inch-(1.3-mm-)thick stainless steel.
5. Mop/Broom Holders: Spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type.
H. Diaper-Changing Station:
W
1. Re-install existing salvaged unit.
40
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit
manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights
indicated.
1 Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf(1112 N), when tested
according to method in ASTM F 446.
B. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function
properly. Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
END OF SECTION 10801
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
was
A. Toilet Tissue Dispenser:
1. B-76867
2. Type: Double-roll dispenser. am
3. Mounting: Surface mounted with concealed anchorage.
4. Material: Stainless steel.
5. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle. sw
6. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2-or 5-inch-(114-or 127-mm-).
B. Combination Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: *r
1. B-3699
2. Type: Surface. am
3. Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 350 C-fold or 475 multifold paper towels.
4. Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 2 gal. (7.5 Q.
5. Accessories: Vinyl,reusable waste-receptacle liner.
C. Liquid-Soap Dispenser:
1. Owner supplied.
2. Mounting: Surface.
D. Grab Bar:
1. Material: Stainless steel,0.05 inch (1.3 mm)thick.
2. Mounting: Concealed.
3. Gripping Surfaces: Smooth, satin finish.
4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches(38 mm)for heavy-duty applications.
E. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit:
1. Rubbermaid
2. Mounting: Surface. ,..
3. Material: Plastic.
4. Door or Cover: Self-closing.
5. Receptacle: Removable and reusable.
F. Robe Hook:
1. H.B. Ives, No.582, MB26D Finish.
2. Double-Prong Unit: Stainless-steel, double-prong robe hook with rectangular wall bracket
and backplate for concealed mounting.
G. Mop and Broom Holder:
1. B-224
2. Material: Stainless steel.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 10801 -TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
±w
A. This Section includes the following:
�w
1. Toilet and bath accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
..0r
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Toilet and Bath Accessories:
a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No. 4 finish (satin), 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum
nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: ASTM B 19,ASTM.B 16(ASTM B 16M),or ASTM B 30 castings.
wr
C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M, 0.0359-inch(0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60(2180).
E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456,Service Condition Number SC 2(moderate service).
F. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M,hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
G. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft
resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.
H. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College Aft
Northampton, MA
C. Stirrup Brackets: Clear-anodized aluminum or Stainless steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Toilet Compartments: Overhead braced and floor anchored.
B. Urinal Screens: Wall hung.
C. Solid-Plastic, Polymer-Resin Units: Provide aluminum heat-sink strips at exposed bottom edges of
panels and doors.
D. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, 24-inch-(610-mm-)wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet
compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-
mm-)wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
E. Door Hardware: Aluminum or Stainless steel hardware units that comply with accessibility
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to
people with disabilities.
1. Hinges: Self-closing type, concealed integral hinge, adjustable to hold door open at any
angle up to 90 deg rees.
2. Latches and Keepers: Surface-mounted unit designed for emergency access and with
combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper.
3. Coat Hook: Combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from
hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
4. Door Bumper: Rubber-tipped bumpers at out-swinging doors or entrance screen doors.
5. Door Pull: Provide at out-swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors at AW
compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
PART 3-EXECUTION
XW
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb, with not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) between
pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and walls. Provide .�
brackets, pilaster shoes, bracing, and other components required for a complete installation. Use
theft-resistant exposed fasteners finished to match hardware. Use sex-type bolts for through-bolt
applications.
1. Stirrup Brackets: Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
2. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 deg Tees from closed
position when unlatched.
END OF SECTION 10155
.w
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 10155-TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet compartments and screens as follows:
Mw 1. Type: Solid-plastic, polymer resin.
2. Compartment Style: Overhead braced and floor anchored.
3. Screen Style: Wall hung.
g
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation, and attachments to
other Work.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color and pattern required.
40
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Compression Polymers Group;Comtec Industries.
w� 2. Santana Products, Inc.
40 2.2 MATERIALS
A. Panel, Pilaster, and Door Material:
a
1. Solid-Plastic, Polymer Resin: High-density polyethylene (HDPE) with homogenous color
throughout. Provide material not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick with seamless
construction and eased edges.
a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
B. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless steel, not less than 3 inches(75 mm)high.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ,
Northampton, MA
B. Coordinate Project-site-assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories. Join parts with a
neat, precise fit. ..
END OF SECTION 10100
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 10100-VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Tackboards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
40 A. Product Data: For each type of visual display board and accessory indicated.
B. Samples: For each exposed finish.
on
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 TACKBOARDS
A. Manufacturer: Forbo Industries
B. Linoleum Cork Tackboards: Seamless sheet, 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick, ground natural cork
40 compressed with a resinous binder and integral color throughout, laminated to burlap backing.
C. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate frames and trim of not less than 0.062-inch-(1.57-mm-)thick, extruded-aluminum alloy.
Provide straight, single-length units. Keep joints to a minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline
closure.
1. Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to
normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated.
40
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units in with perimeter lines level, straight, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing
materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors,trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.
s
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
E. Wood and Hardboard:
1. Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semigloss alkyd-enamel
�..
finishes.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
3.4 INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE
A. Stain-Varnish Finish (Wood Doors): Two finish coats of varnish over a sealer coat and interior
wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain.
1. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler. am
2. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain.
3. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer.
4. Finish Coats: Interior alkyd-or polyurethane-based clear satin varnish. ..
END OF SECTION 09912
MR
.s.
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912-6
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
to Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint
materials from Project site.
ON
B. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
49
C. Provide 'Vet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
40
1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
so
3.3 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete:
1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
no
a. Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint.
go
B. Concrete Unit Masonry:
40 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler.
a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
+0 b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint.
C. Mineral-Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels:
qW 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: One finish coat over primer.
a. Primer: Waterbourne epoxy primer.
4W
b. Finish Coats: Polyamide epoxy semi-gloss
40 D. New and Existing Plaster:
1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
Am a. Primer: Interior plaster primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint.
VA 2. Epoxy Finish(Toilet Rooms): One finish coat over a primer.
a. Primer: Waterbourne epoxy primer.
b. Finish Coats: Polyamide epoxy semi-gloss.
IN
PAINTING(PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912-5
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College .�.
Northampton, MA
1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles. �.
3. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
G. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. .�
H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise
prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
1. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional
coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance.
1. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by manufacturer.
K. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. ...
L. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage
with pores filled.
M. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer,
to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by
others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in
first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient
sealing.
N. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be -�
acceptable.
O. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even
luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel,
nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
..
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
..
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912-4
am
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4 for inspection and acceptance of surfaces to be
painted.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and
similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible
because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface
preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release
agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to
improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or
other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes
and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth
when dried.
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends,
on faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and
paneling.
C. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
go varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
E. Material Preparation:
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.
F. Exposed Surfaces: Include areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector
covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in
these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.
PAINTING(PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
3. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints).
4. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).
5. Pratt& Lambert
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types
specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not
be acceptable. ..
C. Colors: Match architect's samples.
2.3 PREPARATORY COATS
A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler of finish coat �.
manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on
substrate indicated.
B. Exterior Primer: Exterior alkyd or latex-based primer of finish coat manufacturer and
recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated.
C. Interior Primer: Interior latex-based or alkyd primer of finish coat manufacturer and
recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated.
1. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate
indicated, use paint specified for finish coat.
2.4 INTERIOR FINISH COATS ..
A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275.
B. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: '•"
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 09912-PAINTING(PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed interior items and
surfaces.
ws
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples: For each type of finish-coat material indicated.
�uw
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg Q. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg Q.
C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air are between 45 and 95 deg F(7 and 35 deg Q.
D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at
temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C)above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other
Part 2 articles.
B. Manufacturers' Names: Product systems equal to manufacturers system in schedule may be by
any of the following maunufacturers:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore).
2. ICI Paint Stores, Inc. (Dulux Paint).
PAINTING(PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10
percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.
B. Carpet Cushion Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form agreeing to replace carpet cushion that
does not comply with requirements or that fails within 10 years from date of Substantial
Completion. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion from unusual
traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failure includes, but is not limited to,
permanent indentation or compression.
am
PART 2-PRODUCTS
lox
2.1 CARPET
A. Allowances: The Contractor shall carry an allowance of $40.00 per sq. yd. for supplying and
installing carpet in designated areas. Allowance shall consider room dimensions and seaming
patterns to minimize waste. M,
PART 3 -EXECUTION
wo
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 10, "Attached Cushion."
B. Maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in
closed position. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
C. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
END OF SECTION 09680
CARPET 09680-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 09680-CARPET
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes carpet with integral carpet cushion.
" 1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: For each for each carpet, cushion, and exposed accessory and for each
color and pattern required.
C. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation
Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Comply with CRI 104,Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
on
A. General: Comply with CRI 104,Section 6.1, "Site Conditions;Temperature and Humidity."
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet and cushion until wet work in spaces is
complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels
indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
An C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by manufacturer.
W4
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Carpet Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace carpet
that does not comply with requirements or that fails within 10 years from date of Substantial
Completion. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet from unusual traffic,
CARPET 09680- 1
ear
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ...
Northampton, MA
G. Job-Formed Corners:
1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an ..e
inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave
back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.
3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates ..�
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would
otherwise be exposed.
am
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
.w
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. ...
B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. .�
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09653
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-4
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates for Stair Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
+ ► 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
3. Moisture Testing:
des a. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after
substrates pass testing.
C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
Do not use solvents.
D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least
48 hours in advance of installation.
' 1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where
they are to be installed.
F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts,.carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent
pieces aligned.
C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.
E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base
with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
F. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces.
4
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-3
4"
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE
A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861.
1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products.
2. Endura.
3. Johnsonite.
4. Nora Rubber Flooring, Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc..
B. Type(Material Requirement): TS(rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or TP(rubber, thermoplastic). ..�
C. Group(Manufacturing Method): I(solid, homogeneous) or II(layered).
D. Style: Cove (with top-set toe), except Straight(toeless)with carpet.
E. Minimum Thickness: 0.080 inch (2.0 mm).
F. Height: 4 inches(102 mm).
G. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
H. Outside Corners: Premolded.
s
I. Inside Corners: Job formed.
J. Surface: Smooth.
2.4 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY ..�
A. Description: Reducer strip for resilient floor covering and carpet.
1. Same manufacturer as base. .�
B. Material: Rubber.
C. Profile and Dimensions: As selected from manufacturers range of products.
2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product
manufacturers for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
am
PART 3-EXECUTION
so
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-2
..
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
40 Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 09653-RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
a
1.1 SUMMARY
4
A. This Section includes the following:
Is 1. Wall base.
2. Molding accessories.
40 1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less
than 12 inches(300 mm)long, of each resilient product color,texture, and pattern required.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F
(21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following
time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
'* 3. 48 hours after installation.
B. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
wr PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other
Part 2 articles.
2.2 COLORS AND PATTERNS
A. Colors and Patterns: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
a. Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
I. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction ..
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. No
END OF SECTION 09652
MW
4M
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09652-4
MW
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
E. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48
hours in advance of installation.
1. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be
installed.
R Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Unroll sheet vinyl floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
B. Lay out sheet vinyl floor coverings as follows:
1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.
2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6
inches (152 mm) away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates.
3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.
4. Avoid cross seams.
C. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures,
and built-in furniture including cabinets,pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.
D. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking
device.
F. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
G. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to
permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to
produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces.
H. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil.
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09652-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College .,.
Northampton, MA
PART 2-PRODUCTS
AM
2.1 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERING:
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of following: .m
1. Forbo Industries, Inc.; Classic.
B. Color and Pattern: As selected from manufacturer's full range. "`
C. Sheet Width: 6.6 feet(2.0 m).
am
D. Seaming Method: Heat welded.
o,
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or ON
blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by floor covering
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering
and substrate conditions indicated.
C. Heat Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer.
1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range to contrast with floor covering.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of
floor coverings.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. MW
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
3. Moisture Testing:
a. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after ••A
substrates pass testing.
C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended
by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09652-2
in Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 09652-SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sheet vinyl floor coverings,without backings.
.� 1.2 SUBMITTALS
w
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by-
230-mm)sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required.
1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 6 inches
(150 mm)long, of each color required.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project that are
40 competent in heat-welding techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation.
1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project that are trained or certified by
"" floor covering manufacturer for heat-welding techniques required.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F
(21 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following
time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
D. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09652- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with flooring manufacturer's written installation instructions, but not less than
recommendations in NOFMA's "Installing Hardwood Flooring."
B. Concrete Substrates: Verify that slabs are dry according to test methods recommended by
flooring manufacturer or, if none,by test methods in NOFMA's"Installing Hardwood Flooring."
C. Felt Underlayment: Where strip or plank flooring is nailed to wood grounds, install flooring over
a layer of asphalt-saturated felt.
D. Solid-Wood Strip Flooring: Blind nail or staple flooring to substrate according to NOFMA's
written recommendations.
E. Wood Trim: Nail baseboard to wall and nail shoe molding or other trim to baseboard; do not
nail to flooring.
3.2 SANDING AND FINISHING
A. Machine-sand flooring to remove offsets, ridges, cups, and sanding-machine marks that would be
""' noticeable after finishing. Vacuum and tack with a clean cloth immediately before applying
finish.
B. Fill open-grained hardwood.
C. Fill and repair seams and defects.
D. Apply floor finish components in number of coats recommended by finish manufacturer for
application indicated,but not less than one seal coat and two finish coats.
E. Cover wood flooring before and after finishing during remainder of construction period. Use
heavy kraft-paper or other suitable covering. Do not use plastic sheet or film that could cause
condensation.
war
1. Do not cover site-finished floors with kraft paper, or any other material, until finish
reaches full cure,but not less than seven days after applying last coat.
4.
END OF SECTION 09640
4x
40
on
WOOD FLOORING 09640-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2.1 SOLID-WOOD STRIP OR PLANK FLOORING
A. Solid-Wood, Kiln Dried Flooring:
1. Species and Grade: Select red oak.
2. Cut: Quarter/rift sawn.
.�
3. Thickness: 25/32 inch(20 mm).
4. Face Width: 2-1/4 inches(57 mm).
5. Matching: Tongue and groove, and end matched.
6. Backs: Channeled (kerfed)for stress relief.
7. Lengths: Random-length strips complying with applicable grading rules.
8. Finish: Unfinished.
2.2 FINISHING MATERIALS ..
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. BonaKemi USA, Inc.
2. Dura Seal Division; Minwax Co., Inc.
3. Hillyard Floor Treatments.
4. National Coatings Co.
B. Urethane Finish System: Complete solvent-based, oil-modified system of compatible components
that is recommended by finish manufacturer for application indicated. ..
1. Stain: Penetrating and nonfading type.
a. Color: Match existing wood finish.
2. Floor Sealer: Pliable, penetrating type. ..
3. Finish Coats: Formulated for multicoat application on wood flooring.
C. Wood Filler: Formulated to fill and repair seams, defects, and open-grain hardwood floors;
compatible with finish system components and recommended by filler and finish manufacturers
for use indicated. If required to match approved samples,provide pigmented filler.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226,Type 1, No. 15, asphalt-saturated felt.
B. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than that recommended in NOFMA's
"Installing Hardwood Flooring."
PART 3-EXECUTION
WOOD FLOORING 09640-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 09640-WOOD FLOORING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Solid wood, strip or plank flooring.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details including location and layout of each type of wood
flooring and accessory.
40 C. Samples: For each type of wood flooring and accessory,with stain color and finish required.
40 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Hardwood Flooring: Comply with NOFMA grading rules for species,grade, and cut.
1. Certification: Provide flooring that carries NOFMA grade stamp on each bundle or piece.
A 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conditioning: Maintain relative humidity planned for building occupants and an ambient
on temperature between 65 and 75 deg F (18 and 24 deg C) in spaces to receive wood flooring for at
least seven days before installation, during installation, and for at least seven days after
installation. After post-installation period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature
planned for building occupants.
1. Move wood flooring into spaces where it will be installed, at least seven days before
installation.
2. For unfinished products, open sealed packages to allow wood flooring to acclimatize.
3. Do not install flooring until it adjusts to the relative humidity of and is at the same
temperature as the space where it is to be installed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
WOOD FLOORING 09640- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
3. Cap Material: Aluminum cold-rolled sheet.
4. Cap Finish: Painted white..
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic requirements
indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's"Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders.
C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with
insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss
obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally
effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices.
1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into
concrete slabs.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where
necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate with
concealed fasteners at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3
inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in
12 feet(3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented,bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners
on and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise
fit.
END OF SECTION 09511
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. ..,
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1
zinc coating, soft temper.
4W
1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
0.106-inch-(2.69-mm-)diameter wire. '
E. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's
standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension ow
systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for
exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
.w
2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS:
..
A. Products:
1. Armstrong World Industries: `Cirrus' beveled tegular fine texture panels with HumiGuard
Plus performance and 15 year warranty
B. Classification:
.,e
1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 1.
C. Color: White.
D. Edge Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension system members.
E. Thickness: 3/4 inch(19 mm).
F. Size: 24 by 24 inches(610 by 610 mm) ..
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Products:
1. Compatible system with acoustic panel manufacturer.
B. Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet,
prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M,
not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation, with prefinished 9/16-inch- (15-mm-) wide metal
caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Butt-edge type.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -2
�A
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A, This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples: For each acoustical panel, for each exposed suspension system member, for each
exposed molding and trim, and for each color and texture required.
C. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP-
accredited laboratory.
" ' PART 2-PRODUCTS
* 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products specified.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.
B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.
1. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
s indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory
devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Above suspended ceilings.
C. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Finish: Smooth-troweled finish.
END OF SECTION 09215
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215-6
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of
panels.
4. Single-Layer Fastenin g Methods: Apply gypsum base panels to supports with steel drill
screws.
B. Cementitious panels: Apply panels vertically without abutting end joints and fasten with steel
drill screws.
1. Space fasteners in panels a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c., stagger screws at
abutting panel edges.
3.4 TRIM ACCESSORY AND JOINT REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A. Trim Accessories: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Joint Reinforcement:
1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Reinforce interior angles and flat joints with joint tape
and embedding material to comply with ASTM C 843 and gypsum veneer plaster
manufacturer's written recommendations.
2. Cementitious panels: Reinforce joints between cementitious backer units with joint tape
and embedding material according to unit manufacturer's written recommendations.
3. Aluminum Trim: Apply and embed joint tape over flanges of aluminum trim accessories if
recommended in writing by trim manufacturer.
3.5 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 843 and veneer plaster manufacturer's written
recommendations.
1. Mechanically mix gypsum veneer plaster materials.
2. Where gypsum veneer plaster abuts metal door frames,windows, and other units in veneer
plaster,groove finish coat to eliminate spalling.
3. Do not apply veneer plaster to gypsum base if face paper has faded from exposure to light.
Before applying veneer plaster, use remedial methods to restore bonding capability to faded
face paper according to manufacturer's written recommendations and as approved by
Architect.
B. Concealed Surfaces: Omit gypsum veneer plaster in the following areas where veneer plaster will
be concealed from view in the completed Work, unless otherwise indicated or required to
maintain fire-resistance rating. Do not omit veneer plaster behind cabinets, furniture,
furnishings, and similar removable items.
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215 -5
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College �.
Northampton, MA
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Monolithic Concrete Substrates:
1. Clean surfaces to remove dust, loose particles, grease, oil, incompatible curing compounds,
form-release agents, and other foreign matter and deposits that could impair bond with
bonding compound and plaster.
2. Remove ridges and protrusions greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm) and fill all depressions
greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm)with portland cement mortar. Allow to set and dry.
3. Apply bonding compound on dry and fully cured concrete substrates.
B. Masonry Substrates: Clean surfaces to remove dirt, grease, oil, and other foreign matter and
deposits that could impair bond with plaster.
3.2 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 844 requirements that apply to framing
installation.
B. Steel Partition and Soffit Framing:
1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at
exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
2. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended
ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings.
Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating
partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum base panels.
3. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum veneer plaster
manufacturer's written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs
at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple
studs)at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor
structure above. MW
4. Install furring channels with webs parallel to wall surfaces to minimize wall assembly
thicknesses.
am
3.3 PANEL PRODUCT INSTALLATION
A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Apply according to ASTM C 844,unless manufacturer's written ow
recommendations are more stringent.
1. Do not allow gypsum base to fade from exposure to light. "`
2. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches(304.8 mm)o.c. for vertical applications.
3. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum base panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing),
unless otherwise indicated and minimize end joints. "'
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215-4
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Standard Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. L-Bead: Use at panel edges and dissimilar materials
a. Provide tear away strips for removal after finishing.
B. Joint Tape:
uw� 1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: In material recommended by gypsum veneer plaster
manufacturer for applications indicated.
2. Cementitious Panels: As recommended by cementitious panel manufacturer.
ewe
C. Embedding Material for Joint Tape:
1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Material produced and recommended by gypsum veneer
plaster manufacturer for use with joint tape material and gypsum veneer plaster
applications indicated.
2. Cementitious Panels: Material recommended by cementitious panel manufacturer for
applications indicated.
2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written
recommendations.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining,
gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce
airborne sound transmission.
C. Bonding Compound for Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 631.
D. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002,unless otherwise indicated.
40 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033
to 0.112 inch(0.84 to 2.84 mm)thick.
2. For fastening cementitious panels, use screws of type and size recommended by panel
manufacturer.
E. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls:
1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration
without foam displacement, 1/8 inch(3.2 mm)thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
F. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing),
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
40
PART 3-EXECUTION
40
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College .�
Northampton, MA
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless
otherwise indicated.
a. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating, unless
otherwise indicated.
Be Steel Partition and Soffit Framing:
1. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645 in depth indicated.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch(0.79 mm).
2. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with �*
minimum 1/2-inch-(12.7-mm-)wide flanges, and in depth indicated.
3. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,
and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
2.3 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER
A. One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587 and formulated for application directly ..
over substrate indicated without use of separate base-coat material.
1. Products:
a. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Cameo Veneer Plaster.
b. National Gypsum Company; [Uni-Kalj [X KALibur)Plaster. �*
C. United States Gypsum Co.; DIAMOND Interior Finish Plaster.
2.4 PANEL PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area
and correspond with support system indicated.
B. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 588, products of same manufacturer as plaster, and in
thickness indicated.
1. Regular Type.
C. Cementitious Panels: Flat cement fiber panels conforming with ASTM C 1288-95.
1. Manufacturer: James Hardie Building Products ..
a. Product:Titan 500 with tapered edges, except Titan 250 on furred walls.
2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 09215-GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Gypsum veneer plaster and gypsum base for veneer plaster, over masonry surfaces and
monolithic concrete.
2. Cementitious wall panels for epoxy finish.
3. Non-load-bearing steel framing and furring.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Gypsum Veneer Plaster Products: Obtain gypsum veneer plaster products,
including gypsum base, joint reinforcing tape, embedding material, and plasters, from a single
manufacturer.
B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum veneer plaster assemblies with STC ratings,
provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.
PART 2,PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
A. Steel Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215 - 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA �.
1. Apply barrier coat to mirrored glass backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of
mirrored glass and backing material.
2. Apply mastic in spots to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for
coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrored glass units and face of
mounting surface.
3. After mastic is applied, align mirrored glass units and press into place while maintaining a
minimum air space of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrored glass and mounting
surface.
E. For wall-mounted mirrored glass units, install permanent means of support at top edges with
support designed to prevent mirrored glass from coming away from wall along top edges.
1. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed
with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads
on backs of mirrored glass units.
2. For continuous bottom supports, provide setting blocks 1/8 inch (2 mm)thick by 4 inches
(100 mm)long at quarter points.
3. Install top trim. Fabricate trim in single lengths to fit and cover top edges of mirrored glass
units.
F. Protect mirrored glass from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations.
1. Do not permit edges of silvered mirrored glass to be exposed to standing water.
2. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent silvered mirrored glass from being
exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.
END OF SECTION 08814
0.
ow
MIRRORED GLASS 08814-4
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
C. Vinyl-Backed Safety Mirrored Glass: Apply vinyl backing with pressure-sensitive adhesive coating
over glass coating as recommended by vinyl-backing manufacturer to produce a surface free of
bubbles, blisters, and other imperfections. Use adhesives and vinyl backing compatible with
mirrored glass as certified by organic coating manufacturer.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
*� A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 70 to 90 Shore A hardness.
B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirrored glass manufacturer
go for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.
C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrored glass by
spot application.
1. Top Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/8 and 1 inch (16
and 25 mm) in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inches.
a. Products:
1) C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.; CRL Deep"J" Channel.
2) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc:; Medium Gauge Aluminum Deep Nose "J"
Moulding Upper Bar.
D. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished
color and texture where fasteners are exposed.
E. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide
toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized
anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic
with existing finishes or primers.
B. Install mirrored glass units to comply with written instructions of mirrored glass manufacturer
and with referenced GABA and NAAMM publications. Mount mirrored glass accurately in place
in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images. .
C. Provide space for air circulation between back of mirrored glass units and face of mounting
surface.
D. Mastic Spot Installation System:
MIRRORED GLASS 08814-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Deterioration of Silvered Mirrored Glass: Defects developed from normal use not caused
by maintaining and cleaning mirrored glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the products specified.
2.2 FLOAT GLASS
A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036,Type I(transparent glass, flat).
1. Clear: Class 1 (clear), Quality q2(mirror).
a. Thickness: 6 mm.
2.3 MIRRORED GLASS
A. Silvered Mirrored Glass:
1. Manufacturers:
a. American Mirror Company, Inc.
b. Carolina Mirror Company.
C. Virginia Mirror Co., Inc.
d. Walker Glass Co., Ltd.
2. Shivering: Successive layers of chemically deposited silver, electrically or chemically
deposited copper, and manufacturer's standard organic protective coating applied to
second glass surface to produce coating system complying with FS DD-M-411.
B. Fabrication:
1. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrored glass without marring visible
surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrored glass.
2. Mirrored Glass Edge Treatment: Flat polished.
a. Silvered Mirror Glass: Seal edges after edge treatment to prevent chemical or .�
atmospheric penetration of glass coating.
b. Factory Fabricate: Perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after
cutting to final sizes.
MIRRORED GLASS 08814-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 08814-MIRRORED GLASS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Safety(vinyl-backed) mirrored glass.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
C. Product certificates.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are
certified under the National Glass Association's Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior
Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).
B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations in GABA's "Glazing Manual,"
unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. NAAMM's Publication: For silvered mirrored glass, comply with recommendations in NAAMM's
"Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care, Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of
Mirrors."
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. For silvered mirrored glass, comply with mirrored glass manufacturer's written instructions for
shipping, storing, and handling mirrored glass as needed to prevent deterioration of shivering,
damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors, protected
from moisture including condensation.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace
mirrored glass units that deteriorate f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within five
years from date of Substantial Completion.
MIRRORED GLASS 08814- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project,
with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written
instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system
performance requirements.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL
+ A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other
glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced
glazing publications.
40
1. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site.
3. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
4. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270
mm) unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain
required face clearances.
B. Protection:
1. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter.
C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged, including
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
3.2 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Uncoated Kind HS Clear Float Glass: Class 1 (clear) Kind HS (heat strengthened), Condition A
(uncoated surfaces).
B. Uncoated Clear Fully Tempered Float Glass: Class 1 (clear) Kind FT(fully tempered).
1. Provide where required by application and building code requirements.
END OF SECTION 08800
GLAZING 08800-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College �►
Northampton, MA
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other articles including schedules where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the
following requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.
2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2.2 GLASS MATERIALS
A. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing
select); class,kind, and condition as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3
L Fabrication Process: By vertical (tong-held) or horizontal (roller-hearth) process, at
manufacturer's option.
2.3 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed,butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content WW
of 100 percent with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass
manufacturers for application indicated and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for
products indicated below:
1. AAMA 804.3 tape,where indicated.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85,plus or minus 5. .�
C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness
required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
2.5 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS ►
GLAZING 08800-2
or,
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
W Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 08800-GLAZING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications:
1. Interior borrowed lites.
WS
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
in A. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm
glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for
various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in
go strengths(annealed or heat treated)required to meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,
!�! according to the following requirements:
2. For monolithic-glass lites, provide lites 6 mm thick.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Samples: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square, for each type of glass product indicated, other than
monolithic clear float glass.
C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and
ANSI Z97.1.
�r
B. Glazing Publications: Comply with recommendations of the following, unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
GLAZING 08800- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Examine doors and frames for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled
fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting
performance. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring
connections before electrified door hardware installation.
B. Steel Frame Preparation: Comply with DHI Al 15 series. Drill and tap frames for surface-applied
hardware according to SDI 107.
C. Wood Door Preparation: Comply with DHI Al 15-W series.
D. Mounting Heights: Comply with the following requirements,unless otherwise indicated:
1. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware .A
for Custom Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS31 "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
E. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners
and anchors according to industry standards.
F. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating
equipment and to comply with accessibility requirements.
1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that from an open position of 70 deg Tees, the door ow
will take at least three seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch,
measured to the leading edge of the door.
..
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to .a
perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.
MW
3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
PRIVATE tbll
Am
END OF SECTION 08711
DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -4
4
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2.8 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Stops and Holders: Provide floor stops for doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or
indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops
are not appropriate, provide overhead holders.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies (HAG).
in b. Ives, H. B. (NS).
C. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM).
B. Silencers for Door Frames: Neoprene or rubber; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.
2.9 CYLINDERS, KEYING,AND STRIKES
A. Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.
b. Install permanent cores furnished by Owner.
B. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt,with curved lip
extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set.
+ 2.10 FABRICATION
A. Base Metals: Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware
units and BHMAA156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials if
different from specified standard.
: .
B. Fasteners: Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless
otherwise indicated. Provide steel machine or wood screws or steel through bolts for fire-rated
applications.
' C. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended
Fasteners for Wood Doors."
D. Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2.3 PIVOTS AND HINGES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hinges:
a. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).
B. General: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and
frames, provide only template-produced units.
2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES .�
A. Manufacturers:
1. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR).
B. Backset: 2-3/4 inches(70 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 OPERATING TRIM
A. Push-Pull Design: As scheduled.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies (HAG). ,.
2.6 CLOSERS
A. Surface-Mounted Closers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(LCN).
B. Size of Units: Factory-sized, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening
force.
2.7 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
A. Protective Trim Units: Sized 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) less than door width on push side and 1/2
inch (13 mm) less than door width on pull side, by height scheduled or indicated. Fasten with
exposed machine or self-tapping screws.
1. Material: Metal.
1) Hager Companies (HAG).
2) Ives, H. B. (IVS). .�
3) Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM).
DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 08711 -DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes installation of the following:
1. Commercial door hardware.
IAN 1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Door Hardware Schedule: Organized into door hardware sets indicating type, style, function,
size, label, hand, manufacturer, fasteners, location, and finish of each door hardware item.
Include description of each electrified door hardware function, including sequence of operation.
C. Keying Schedule: Detail Owner's final keying instructions for locks.
D. Product certificates.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supplier Qualifications: The Owner will supply door hardware.
B. Templates: Obtain and distribute templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be
factory prepared for installing door hardware.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
�u►
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product named for each door
hardware item indicated in Door Hardware Sets.
2.2 DOOR HARDWARE
A. Scheduled Door Hardware: Provide door hardware according to Door Hardware Sets at the end
of Part 3. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated.
DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2. Species and Cut: White oak, rift cut.
3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. �*
4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center balance match.
5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by
mullions.
6. Grade: Premium.
B. Interior Veneer-Faced Solid-Core Doors:
1. Core: Either glued or nonglued block or structural composite lumber.
2. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit
abrasive planed before veneering.
C. Blocking: Provide blocking as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.
2.3 FABRICATION .�
A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.
w
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
PART 3 -EXECUTION ow
3.1 INSTALLATION AM
A. Install doors to comply with manufacturers written instructions, referenced quality standard, and
as indicated. W.
B. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim
stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine ..
doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
C. Fit non-fire-rated doors accurately in their respective frames,with the following clearances:
1. Jambs and Head: 3/32 inch(2 mm).
2. Meeting Edges, Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3. Bottom: 3/8 inch (9 mm), unless otherwise indicated.omply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated
doors.
as
END OF SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 08211 -FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes solid core doors as follows:
.� 1. Doors with wood veneer faces.
w
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door.
10 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details; location and extent of hardware blocking; mortises, holes, and cutouts; and
other pertinent data.
C. Samples: For each face material and finish.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's"Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:
1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
2. Eggers Industries;Architectural Door Division.
3. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
4. Oshkosh Architectural Door Co.
5. Weyerhaeuser Company.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Doors for Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium,with Grade AA faces.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
END OF SECTION 08114
CUSTOM STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08114-6
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for
surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site.
2. _Locate hardware as indicated or, if not indicated, according to HMMA 831,
"Recommended Hardware Locations for Custom Hollow Metal Doors and Frames."
2.7 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for cleaning, treating, priming and,when specified, finishing.
4W B. Steel Sheet Finishes:
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
OR "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Immediately after surface preparation, apply fast-
curing, corrosion-inhibiting, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer, ANSI A224.1,
�s compatible with finish coats indicated. Apply smooth coat of even consistency to provide a
uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.7 mils (0.02 mm).
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install doors and frames according to DHI A115.IG and manufacturer's written
4W instructions.
B. Frames:
1. Set masonry anchorage devices where required for securing frames to in-place concrete or
masonry construction.
a. Set anchorage devices according to anchorage device manufacturer's written
instructions. Leave drilled holes rough, not reamed, and free of dust and debris.
2. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners.
3. Placing Frames: Set frames accurately in position; plumb; align, and brace securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces
' and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At existing concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure in place with
ens machine screws and masonry anchorage devices.
b. Field splice only at approved locations. Weld, grind, and finish as required to
conceal evidence of splicing on exposed faces.
C. Touchup: Immediately after erection, touchup finish to match undamaged finish.
CUSTOM STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08114-5
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
F. Floor Anchors: For each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, formed of same material as
frame, 0.067 inch(1.7 mm)thick, as follows: �»
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors,with two holes to receive fasteners, welded
to bottom of jambs and mullions.
G. Head Strut Supports: 3/8-by-2-inch(9-by-50-mm)vertical steel struts extending from top of frame
at each jamb to supporting construction above, unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other
structural support at each jamb.
H. Spreader Bars: Removable, located across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. .�
I. Rubber Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stop in strike jamb to receive
three silencers on single-door frames and drill head jamb stop to receive two silencers on double-
door frames. Install plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction.
J. Plaster Guards: 0.016-inch-(0.4-mm-)thick guards or dust-cover boxes of same material as frame,
welded to frame at back of hardware cutouts to close off interior of openings and prevent mortar
or other materials from obstructing hardware operation.
.«
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Panels: Of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for doors. am
B. Stops and Moldings: For solid,glazed, and louvered panels.
1. Fixed: Integral with frame, unless otherwise indicated. mo
2. Removable: Where indicated or required, formed of 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm) thick steel
sheets matching steel frames. Secure with countersunk machine screws spaced uniformly
not more than 12 inches (300 mm)o.c. Form corners with butted hairline joints. wow
3. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glass or panel and
type of installation indicated.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors and frames rigid, neat in appearance, and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Weld
exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Where practical, fit and assemble units in
manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before
shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site.
B. Exposed Fasteners: Provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts.
C. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware, including cutouts,
reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to final hardware schedule and
templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI Al 15
Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.
CUSTOM STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08114-4
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Hinges and Pivots: 0.167 inch (4.2 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 6 inches
(150 mm)longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds.
2. Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: 0.093 inch (2.3 mm)thick.
3. All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: 0.053 inch(1.3 mm)thick.
H. Interior Doors: Fabricate face sheets of doors from 0.042-inch- (1.06-mm-).thick, cold-rolled,
stretcher-leveled steel sheets and other metal components from hot-or cold-rolled steel sheets.
I. Exterior Doors: Fabricate face sheets of doors from 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, stretcher-leveled,
metallic-coated steel sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of doors to permit entrapped
moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
2.4 FRAMES
A. General: Full-welded unit construction, with corners mitered, reinforced, and continuously
welded full depth and width of frame.
1. Interior Frames: Formed from cold-or hot-rolled steel sheet of the following thicknesses:
a. Openings up to and Including 48 Inches(1200 mm)Wide: 0.053 inch (1.3 mm).
B. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate from same material as frame. Minimum thickness of steel
reinforcing plates for hardware as follows:
1. Hinges and Pivots: 0.167 inch (4.2 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 6 inches
(150 mm)longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds.
2. Strikes, Flush Bolts, and Closers: 0.093 inch(2.3 mm).
3. Surface-Mounted, Hold-Open Arms and Panic Devices: 0.093 inch (2.3 mm).
C. Mullions and Transom Bars: Closed or tubular mullions and transom bars. Fasten mullions and
+ transom bars at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. Reinforce joints between frame members
with concealed clip angles or sleeves of same metal and thickness as frame.
D. Head Reinforcement: Where installed in masonry, leave vertical mullions in frames open at top
for grouting.
E. Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls according
to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
1. Metal-Stud Partitions: Insert type with notched clip to engage metal stud, formed of same
material as frame, not less than 0.042 inch(1.0 mm)thick.
a. Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches(1500 to 2250 mm)in height.
2. In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Anchor frame jambs with minimum 3/8-inch- (9-mm-)
diameter concealed bolts into expansion shields or inserts 6 inches (150 mm) from top and
bottom and 26 inches (650 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. Reinforce frames at
anchor locations. Except for fire-rated openings, apply removable stop to cover anchor
bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
CUSTOM STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08114-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2.3 DOORS
A. General: Flush-design, 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick, of seamless hollow construction, unless
otherwise indicated.
ow
1. Visible joints or seams around glazed or louvered panel inserts are permitted.
2. Single-Acting Swing Doors: Bevel vertical edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
3. Double-Acting Swing Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch(54-mm)radius. 00
B. Metallic Core: Welded to both door faces, of construction indicated.
1. Unitized Grid Core: 0.042-inch-(1.06-mm-)thick, formed-steel inner structure with sound AM
deadener applied to inside surfaces of face sheets.
2. Steel-Stiffened Core: 0.026-inch (0.66-mm) steel vertical stiffeners extending full-door
height, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) apart and spot welded to face sheets a
maximum of 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with insulation of
minimum 0.6-lb/cu. ft. (9.6-kg/cu. m) density or sound deadener applied to inside surfaces
of face sheets.
3. Continuous Truss-Form Inner Core: 0.013-inch-(0.33-mm-) thick steel reinforcement spot
welded to face sheets a maximum of 3 inches (75 mm)o.c.vertically and horizontally.
C. Nonmetallic Core: Laminated with waterproof adhesive to both door faces, of construction
indicated.
1. Honeycomb Core: Resin-impregnated kraft paper with maximum 1-inch (25.4-mm) cells
and minimum 42-psi(290-kPa)crushing strength.
2. Polyurethane Core: Minimum 20-psi(138-kPa) compressive strength and not less than 1.8- ...�.
lb/cu. ft. (29-kg/cu. m)density foamed-in-place or rigid board polyurethane.
3. Polystyrene Core: Minimum 0.9-lb/cu. ft. (15-kg/cu. m) density with not less than 18-psi
(124-kPa) shear strength, rigid, foam polystyrene core board complying with ASTM C 578, .,
Type L
D. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated.
E. Astragals: As required by NFPA 80 to provide fire ratings indicated.
F. Top and Bottom Channels: Spot weld metal channel not less than thickness of face sheet to face
sheets not more than 6 inches(150 mm)o.c.
1. Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with inverted horizontal channels of same material as
face sheet so flanges of channels are even with bottom and top edges of face sheets.
2. For exterior doors, close bottom edge with metallic-coated steel closing channel and top
edge with filler channel of same material, so webs of channels are flush with bottom and **+�►►
top door edges.
G. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcing plates from same material as door to comply
with the following:
CUSTOM STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08114-2
MW
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 08114-CUSTOM STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel door frames.
2. Sidelight or borrowed-light frames.
3. Hollow-metal panels and frames.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
1. Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings.
C. Schedule: For doors and frames using same reference numbers as those on Drawings.
PART 2,PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:
" 1. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
2. Ceco Door Products.
3. Pioneer Industries.
' 4. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, commercial steel (CS), Type B. Thickness
indicated is minimum thickness according to HMMA 803,Steel Tables.
B. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into
exterior walls, zinc coat according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,Class C or D as applicable.
go
CUSTOM STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08114- 1
0
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
C. Solid-Surfacing-Material Countertops:
1. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
3. Integral bowls: Corian 810 bowls with overflow.
4. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations
40 for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas and examine
and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming before
installation.
B. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade
specified in this Section for type of woodwork involved.
C. Install tops level, plumb,true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400
'! mm). Shim as required with concealed shims.
D. Scribe and cut to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts.
E. Anchor to blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk,
concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use stainless steel
screws with finishing washers for exposed fastening of removable panels.
F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall with silicone
sealant.
' END OF SECTION 06402
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ...
Northampton, MA
humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction
period.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS
A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide interior architectural woodwork
by fabricators approved by Smith College.
sm
2.2 MATERIALS
ow
A. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Formica Corporation.
b. International Paper; Decorative Products Div. .�.
C. Laminart.
d. Pioneer Plastics Corp.
e. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
B. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
ANSI Z124.3, for Type 5 or Type 6 material and performance requirements, without a precoated
finish. ..
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. DuPont Polymers; Corian.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. ,.
Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Premium complying with the referenced quality standard.
2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters
and burrs.
...
B. Plastic-Laminate Countertops and panels:
im
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-2
�Ib
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 06402-INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
r
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes interior woodwork including for the following applications:
1. Plastic-laminate panels.
w 2. Plastic-laminate countertops.
3. Solid-surfacing-material countertops.
B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips,
unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Solid surface countertops and integral bowls
B. Shop Drawings: Include location of each item, plans and elevations, large-scale details,
attachment devices, and other components.
C. Samples:
1. Plastic-laminate-clad panel products, for each type, color,pattern, and surface finish.
2. Solid-surfacing materials.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork.
B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and
other requirements.
1. Provide AWI certification labels or compliance certificate indicating that woodwork
complies with requirements of grades specified.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402- 1
4M
on
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
0.0 Smith College
Northampton, MA
B. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
�w
C. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and
reamer wings.
00
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers,
blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other
r construction.
B. Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized
standards.
C. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.
+wr
D. Wood Trim Installation: Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length
pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Cope at returns and miter at corners to
produce tight-fitting joints. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
1. Install trim after gypsum board joint-finishing operations are completed.
2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb.
Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush
installation and 1/16-inch(1.6-mm)maximum offset for reveal installation.
END OF SECTION 06105
wa
war
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 -3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
am
A. Provide miscellaneous lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the
following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Furring.
4. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide same grade as framing lumber with 15 percent
maximum moisture content of any species. MW
C. For exposed boards, provide lumber, with 15 percent maximum moisture content, of any closed
grain premium grade hardwood.
.m
D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the
following species and grades:
1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.
2. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.
2.4 INTERIOR WOOD TRIM
A. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): Finished lumber (S4S), either finger-jointed or solid
lumber, of one of the following species and grades:
1. Grade A Finish alder, aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple, sycamore,
tupelo, or yellow poplar; NHLA.
2.5 SHELVING *�
A. Shelving: 3/4-inch(19-mm)paint grade birch veneer plywood with hardwood edges.
B. Standards: Hafele 282.11.707 angular supports for 5mm drilled holes in standards at 2" o.c.
2.6 PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-
retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm)
thick.
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative
humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 06105-MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Miscellaneous lumber.
2. Interior wood trim.
3. Shelving.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product indicated.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S,unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-
inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wood Structural Panels:
1. Plywood: DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. General: Of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National
Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.
B. Miscellaneous Framing: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species:
1. Hem-fir or Hem-fir(north);NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Southern pine; SPIB.
3. Spruce-pine-fir(south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA.
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05500
0
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-3
low
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ..
Northampton, MA
I. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
2. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize we
distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion
without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds
smooth and blended.
3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
B. Shelf Angles: Fabricate shelf angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to framing. Fabricate .�
with horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches
(150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm)o.c. ..
1. Galvanize shelf angles to be installed in exterior walls.
C. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Fabricate steel framing and supports that are not a part of .�
structural-steel framework as necessary to complete the Work from structural steel of welded
construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Shop prime ferrous-metal items not indicated to be galvanized. ..
1. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
2. Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for ..
shop painting.
PART 3-EXECUTION Im
3.1 INSTALLATION am
A. General: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for securing metal fabrications to in-place
construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set am
metal fabrications accurately in location,with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true.
1. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into ..
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
2. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not weld, cut, or abrade galvanized surfaces. am
B. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection.
1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up am
paint with the same material as used for shop painting.
am
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 05500-METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Shelf angles.
N. 2. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation, and attachments to
other Work.
C. Templates: For anchor bolts.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.
B. Ferrous Metals:
1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47
(ASTM A 47M) malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers,
and shims as needed,hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2.2 PAINT
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alley
primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664 and compatible with finish
paint systems indicated.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Connections, General: Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of
deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field welds will be subject to inspection.
B. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractors expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 05310
STEEL DECK 05310-3
40
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 16 gage.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
.W
A. Accessories: Steel deck manufacturer's standard accessory materials, including mechanical
fasteners, closure strips,pour stops, and closures for deck.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
C. Repair Paint: Lead-and chromate-free rust-inhibitive primer.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI
Publication No. 29, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned
and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract
side-lap interlocks.
C. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.
D. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting
through or adjacent to decking.
4W
E. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of decking, and support of other work.
F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, .®
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
1. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical
fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting
structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Floor Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI
recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of decking.
I. Repairs and Protection:
STEEL DECK 05310-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 05310-STEEL DECK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Noncomposite form deck.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B. Product certificates.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D 1.1, "Structural Welding Code--
Steel," and AWS D 1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
B. AISI Specifications: Calculate structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's
"Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. BHP Steel Building Products USA Inc.
2. United Steel Deck, Inc.
3. Wheeling Corrugating Co.; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp.
2.2 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK
A. Noncomposite Steel Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form deck panels to
comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," in SDI
Publication No. 29, the minimum section properties indicated, and the following:
' 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230),
G60 V1$0)zinc coating.
STEEL DECK 05310- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College `
Northampton, MA
1. Primers and Aggregates: Recommended in writing by manufacturer for substrate,
thickness, and conditions indicated.
PART 3,EXECUTION �.
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Prepare and clean substrates. Provide clean, dry, neutral-pH substrate for underlayment
application.
1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through
underlayment.
2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking. .w
3. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing
compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might
impair underlayment bond. 00
4. Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes,
sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.
B. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Coordinate application of components, including primer, to provide optimum underlayment-to-
substrate and intercoat adhesion.
AM
D. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue
through underlayment.
E. Apply underlayment to produce uniform,level surface. 'm
1. Apply a final layer without aggregate if required to produce smooth surface.
2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. so
F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including
areas that emit a"hollow"sound when tapped. so
G. Do not install finish flooring over underlayment until after time period recommended by
underlayment manufacturer. .•
END OF SECTION 03542
CEMENT-BASED UNDERIAYMENT 03542-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 03542-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling underlayment for interior
finish flooring.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
an
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Verify compatibility of cement-based underlayment including surface sealers, if any, with
indicated finish flooring products, including adhesives.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
1. W. R. Bonsal Company; Self-Leveling Underlayment.
2. Burke Group, LLC(The); 300 Premium Underlayment.
3. Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc.;Thoro Underlayment,Self-Leveling.
4. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Levelex Underlayment.
C. Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in
uniform thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent
floor elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic
w cement as defined by ASTM C 219.
2. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (28 MPa) at 28 days when tested according
to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
D. Accessory Materials:
CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT 03542- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies
to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears
on the surface.
1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.
C. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to
floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or
membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
D. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces
exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a ..
cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.
3.4 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection, and follow recommendations
in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions occur before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's
written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before •�
float finishing.
C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
D. Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days as follows:
I. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least
12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any
holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
END OF SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2
minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of
batch is released.
2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds
for each additional 1 cu.yd. (0.76 cu. m).
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Formwork: Design, construct, erect, shore,brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.
B. Steel Reinforcement: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing,
and supporting reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
C. Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
1. Construction Joints: Locate and install so as not to impair strength or appearance of
concrete, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
2. Isolation Joints: Install joint-filler strips at junctions with slabs-on-grade and vertical
surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as
indicated.
a. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 117,"Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials."
3.2 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Comply with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing
concrete.
` B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.
C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment.
3.3 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for
concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I or II .
2. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, not exceeding 1-inch (25-mm)
nominal size.
3. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330.
4. Water: Complying with ASTM C 94. ..
D. Admixtures:
1. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
2. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type A.
E. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
F. Curing Materials:
1. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for
application to fresh concrete.
2. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf.
2.2 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures.
B. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, for normal-weight concrete ..
determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows:
1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 4000 psi(27.6 MPa).
2. Slump: 3 inches(75 mm).
C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of
placement having an air content of 2.5 to 4.5 percent.
1. Air content of trowel-finished interior concrete floors shall not exceed 3.0 percent.
2.3 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with ASTM C 94.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 03300-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mix
design,placement procedures, and finishes.
B. See Division 2 Section"Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following, unless
modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1. General requirements, including submittals, quality assurance, acceptance of structure, and
protection of in-place concrete.
2. Formwork and form accessories.
3. Steel reinforcement and supports.
4. Concrete mixtures.
5. Handling,placing, and constructing concrete.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
O.
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Formwork: Furnish formwork and form accessories according to ACI 301.
B. Steel Reinforcement:
1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60(Grade 420), deformed.
2. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185,fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat
sheets.
ON
C. Concrete Materials:
00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College �•
Northampton, MA
i. Remove labels that are not permanent.
j. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and .�
electrical nameplates.
k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
1. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. ..
M. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces
of diffusers, registers, and grills.
o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with
requirements for new fixtures.
p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials
into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.
END OF SECTION 01770 AM
MW
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-6
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator
of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health
or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems,
and equipment not part of a system.
1. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal
operation,provide similar instruction at the start of each season.
r�
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
air
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with
local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
+0
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
40
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
C. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
d. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
as free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including plenums,
shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
f. Sweep concrete floors broom-clean in unoccupied spaces.
g. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo
if visible soil or stains remain.
h. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-5
ON
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College no
Northampton, MA
performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for
continued use and reference.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include
operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: ...
1. Operation Data: Include emergency instructions and procedures, system and equipment
descriptions, operating procedures, and sequence of operations.
2. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's information, list of spare parts, maintenance
procedures, maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance,
and copies of warranties and bonds. ""
B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and
index data in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify
each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.
1.7 WARRANTIES
MM
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the
Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is am
indicated.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual. am
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring,vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness
as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-1l-inch (115-by-280-
mm)paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab
to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES,"Project name, and name of Contractor.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. ..
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-4
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area
affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including,
if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project
Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for
Architect's reference during normal working hours.
B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that
shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether
individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up
Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be
' readily identified and recorded later.
b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
2. Mark record sets with erasable,red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
3. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate
numbers, and similar identification where applicable.
4. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with
durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings,where applicable.
D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other
Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ..
Northampton, MA
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection
or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by ..�
Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
2. Submit copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed
or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list
shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of
construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
aw
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS(PUNCH LIST)
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 01770-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Project Record Documents.
3. Operation and maintenance manuals.
4. Warranties.
5. Instruction of Owner's personnel.
6. Final cleaning.
B. See Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for
Substantial and Final Completion.
C. See Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting Final Completion
construction photographs and negatives.
D. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for
products of those Sections.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the
list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
an services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
go Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property
surveys, and similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
END OF SECTION 01732
MW
.A
No
..
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-6
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
equipment to match new equipment.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
" original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
*0 3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition
operations.
B. Patching: Comply with Division 1 Section"Cutting and Patching."
C. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for
new materials.
1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an
approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
D. Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining
construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
E. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into
another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of
uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and
replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
F. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of
uniform appearance.
aw 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to
accumulate on-site.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-5
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ...
3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS Northampton, MA
A. Dust Control: Use temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and .�
dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations.
1. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition
enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas.
B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent �w
surfaces and areas.
C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective
demolition operations began.
ws
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations.
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed
spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space .A
before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression
devices during flame-cutting operations.
4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting
elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during
selective demolition operations.
C. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-4
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during
selective demolition operations.
B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in
writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during
interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting,
removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility
disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing.
40
3.3 PREPARATION
40
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
w
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing
regulations.
2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
w
C. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit
dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-3
4
w
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ..
Northampton, MA
K Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition
and removal work,with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility services,
use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than
48 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.
B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. ..
1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without
written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. *■*
C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished.
I. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner
as far as practical.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the w
Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner
..
under a separate contract.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
L Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials
that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-2
�e
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
0 Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 01732-SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
w
A. This Section includes demolition and removal of the following:
1. Selected portions of a building or structure.
2. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.
B. See Division 15 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items.
C. See Division 16 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated
to remain Owners property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall
be removed from Project site.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Proposed Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the measures proposed
for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if
proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include measures for the following:
1. Dust control.
2. Noise control.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College �*
Northampton, MA
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
am
END OF SECTION 01731
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -4
w
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to
adjoining areas.
D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned,
bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
a original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required,
and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when
not in use.
2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed
surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
40 where required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
"w entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
40 C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these
Specifications.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate
integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration
into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching
and refinishing.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ..
Northampton, MA
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or ••+
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic
qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties. �*
PART 2-PRODUCTS .0
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
I. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
I. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
.w
3.2 PREPARATION
,.
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. ..
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed
during cutting and patching operations.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 01731 -CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 ,GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
w
A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
W B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
.w C. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. See
Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and
patching mechanical and electrical installations.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 7 days before
the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the
following information:
1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why
they cannot be avoided.
2. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance
and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
4. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List
utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate
how long service will be disrupted.
5. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and
patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of
unsatisfactory work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
ew
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
3.8 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Cutting and Patching."
1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
on B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
am without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
on that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 01700
40
40
40
M
®0
in
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-5
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ■°
Northampton, MA
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper
execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly. .�
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate. e..
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste
materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
G. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
H. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
1. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious
exposure during the construction period.
3.6 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for
proper operation.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. .�
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage ...
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-4
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts,and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
*e' B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
w� C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
4w
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
40 heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
4" F. joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
no G. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress
cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements
strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F(27 deg C).
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College °
Northampton, MA
C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or
Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or .�
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's permission.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to "'
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include
a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents.
aw
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
1. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
2. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
3. Check the location, level and plumb,of every major element as the Work progresses.
4. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
B. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building �.
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
W Smith College
Northampton, MA
W SECTION 01700-EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. General installation of products.
3. Progress cleaning.
4. Starting and adjusting.
5. Protection of installed construction.
6. Correction of the Work.
B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and
' final cleaning.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
1. Before construction,verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and
verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the
Work.
1. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities
serving Project site.
�r
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section
"Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01500
on
e^
on
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-7
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College *�
Northampton, MA
E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress
and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.
Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Install tarpaulins securely using fire-retardant-treated wood framing and other materials.
F. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit
dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
1. Construct dustproof partitions of not less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) studs, 5/8-inch
(16-mm)gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side.
2. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks.
G. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities,
install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against
reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.
1. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible
from space being served,with sign mounted above.
a. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose;
provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. '•"
2. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection
facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting.
3. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. AM
4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition.
5. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete WX
installation of permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place
into operation and use.
3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and ..
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from
damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
L Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,
when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial
Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been ••
delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed
surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-6
.R
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
W Smith College
Northampton, MA
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
B. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste
from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary
waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution
Requirements " for progress cleaning requirements.
1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled,
for each type of waste material to be deposited.
2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of waste
materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide detailed
information for on-site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. Provide
ow information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used to dispose
of all waste materials.
ON C. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are cleaned
and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to
condition existing before initial use.
No 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs
and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged,
restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
"w► minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of
noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms
near Project site.
B. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from construction damage. Protect tree root systems from damage,
flooding, and erosion.
,w C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for
erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning
signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide
lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-5
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable
materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for
disposal of used material.
2. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing women's toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as
facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. Install self-
contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Provide facilities for male
personnel.
3. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide bottled-water, drinking-water units.
E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction ..
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation
requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
F. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution �.
system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include
meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic ground-fault
interrupters, and main distribution switchgear.
1. Install electric power service underground, unless overhead service must be used.
2. Install power distribution wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to
damage.
G. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as
equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.
H. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and +••
equipment.
1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if
single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not
exceed safe length voltage ratio.
I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
2. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp per 500 sq. ft. (45 sq. m), uniformly distributed, for
general lighting, or equivalent illumination. •+�
3. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp every 50 feet(15 m) in traffic areas.
4. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp per story in stairways and ladder runs, located to
illuminate each landing and flight. ..,
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-4
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
E. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for
surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be
nonmetallic sheathed cable.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
t^ 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with
performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required.
Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of
completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to
40 existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder
with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company
recommendations.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is
available, provide trucked-in services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent
that can be discharged lawfully.
1. Maintain temporary sewers facilities in a clean, sanitary condition.
C. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as
facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial
Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
1. Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site.
2. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a
drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly
from pans.
D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets,wash facilities, and drinking water fixtures. Comply
with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of
fixtures and facilities.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500,3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time,when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of
temporary service to use of permanent service. ..
1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service
during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously
assigned responsibilities.
NOW B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by
all parties engaged in the Work:
1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. am
2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition ..
may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended.
B. Tarpaulins: Fire-resistive labeled with flame-spread rating of 15 or less.
C. Water: Potable.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as
indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures.
I. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size •�•
required by location and class of fire exposure.
B. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or
combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar
nonabsorbent material.
C. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water, drinking-water units,
including paper cup supply.
D. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to
120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset
button, and pilot light.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary
utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete,
insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are
closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
1.3 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect
and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and
facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, occupants of
Project, Architect, testing and inspecting agencies and personnel of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Water Service: Use water from Owner's existing water system without metering and without
payment of use charges.
C. Electric Power Service: Use electric power from Owner's existing system without metering and
without payment of use charges.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6,NECA's"Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241.
1. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
�w
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
1. No exception taken
2. Make corrections noted
3. Not approved
4. Revise and Resubmit
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal
to appropriate party.
D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 01330
40
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-7
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements.
L. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed
by a qualified testing agency.
M. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect
for Project. ...
N. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1
Section"Closeout Procedures."
O. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. ..
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
P. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a ^`
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer.
Q. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction
Progress Documentation."
ow
PART 3-EXECUTION
ow
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections '"
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name ow
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and
approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. am
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
saw
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-6
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed
by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
Requirements."
w
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation."
C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and
addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements.
E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply
with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure
Qualification Record (PQR)on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements and,where required,is authorized for this specific Project.
G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience
where required.
H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements.
I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements.
die
J. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before
installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation
needed for adhesion.
K. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-5
IN
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 24 by
36 inches(600 by 900 mm).
D. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management
and Coordination."
E. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: ..
1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Quality Requirements" for mockups.
2. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from
the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color
and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, partial sections of
manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete
units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color
range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.
a. Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will
be returned.
3. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of
qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated.
Attach label on unexposed side.
4. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
5. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control
comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to �•
determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
F. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for
the Work and their intended location.
G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation."
H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures."
J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Use [CSI Form 1.5A] [sample form at end of Section].
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-4
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
�r
Smith College
Northampton, MA
PART 2-PRODUCTS
u
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit four copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project
Record Document.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
f. Printed performance curves.
g. Operational range diagrams.
h. Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
i. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
40 Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.
C. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control
wiring.
f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
g. Templates and patterns.
h. Schedules.
i. Notation of coordination requirements.
j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College .�
Northampton, MA
I. Initial Review: Allow 7 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect *"
will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.
3. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit *�
submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.
D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. MW
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches(100 by 125 mm) on label or beside title block
to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. ..
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Unique identifier, including revision number.
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. �^
k. Other necessary identification.
E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents *+�
on submittals.
F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless ,,..
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal
may serve as final submittal.
G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. ..
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without
review, received from sources other than Contractor.
1. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
2. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810.
H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
1. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect
in connection with construction.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-2
s
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton,MA
SECTION 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule and
construction photographs.
C. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties Project Record
Documents and operation and maintenance manuals.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architects approval.
Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until related submittals are received.
B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation' for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of
related construction activities.
C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
C. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take color photographs weekly, documenting field
conditions. Select vantage points to best show status of construction and progress since last
photographs were taken.
END OF SECTION 01320
sr
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-5
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ..
Northampton, MA
3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect on the schedule of the following:
a. Coordination with existing construction.
b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
C. Uninterruptible services.
d. Use of premises restrictions.
e. Provisions for future construction.
4. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the .�
Work.
D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Project Phases, Substantial Completion, and Final
Completion.
E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the
proposed change on the overall project schedule.
2.3 REPORTS
A. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information. ..,
Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for
changing the Contract Documents.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. ..
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned am
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS "'
A. Photographic Film: 35mm.
.r
B. Date Stamp: Unless otherwise indicated, date and time stamp each photograph as it is being
taken so stamp is integral to photograph.
d.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-4
..o
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
PART 2-PRODUCTS
w
2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required
by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
�w 2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction
Schedule.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of
Substantial Completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically
allowed by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and
major items as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are
not limited to, submittals, approvals,purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
a. Hollow Metal Frames
b. Toilet Partitions
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1
Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in
Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architects administrative procedures necessary
for certification of Substantial Completion.
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two printed copies of initial schedule, one a
reproducible print and one a blue- or black-line print, large enough to show entire schedule for
entire construction period.
1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or
actual start date if known.
2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in
ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.
3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
C. Construction Photographs: Submit two prints of each photographic view within seven days of
taking photographs. ,..
1. Format: 4-by-6-inch (203-by-254-mm) smooth-surface gloss prints on single-weight
commercial-grade stock, enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for
standard 3-ring binder.
2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped
impression with the following: am
a. Name of Project.
b. Name and address of photographer. 00
C. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Date photograph was taken. 00
f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and
elevation or story of construction.
D. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. am
1.4 COORDINATION .«
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractors Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts,
Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and
reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
MW
C. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested,
including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities including temporary lighting.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 01320-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
■
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
w
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress
of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submittals Schedule.
3. Field condition reports.
4. Construction photographs.
B. See Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.
C. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic negatives as Project
Record Documents at Project closeout.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that
establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
B. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
C. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for
greater detail.
D. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction
element.
Ms 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format:
1. Scheduled date for first submittal.
2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Submittal category(action or informational).
4. Name of subcontractor.
5. Description of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for Architects final release or approval.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. ..
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do AM
so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: AM
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals. ••
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access. ..
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Work hours, 00
10) Hazards and risks.
11) Progress cleaning.
12) Quality and work standards. am
13) Change Orders.
14) Documentation of information for payment requests.
3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who am
should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since
the previous meeting and report.
.w
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue am
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) ..,
PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01310
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-4
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
" Northampton, MA
q. Progress cleaning.
r. Working hours.
R
C;, Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
C. Related Change Orders.
d. Purchases.
e. Deliveries.
f. Submittals.
g. Review of mockups.
h. Possible conflicts.
i. Compatibility problems.
j. Time schedules.
k. Weather limitations.
1. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
m. Warranty requirements.
n. Compatibility of materials.
o. Acceptability of substrates.
P. Temporary facilities and controls.
q. Space and access limitations.
r. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
S. Testing and inspecting requirements.
t. Required performance results.
U. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements.
4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work
and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings
with preparation of payment requests.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
MM
1.3 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Smith College Physical Plant.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting
minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of the
meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction,
at the earliest time convenient to Owner and Architect after execution of the Agreement. Hold
the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review ,.
responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and .d
other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference
shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: MM
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
C. Critical work sequencing.
d. Designation of responsible personnel.
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
g. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
h. Submittal procedures.
L Preparation of Record Documents.
j. Use of the premises.
k. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
1. Parking availability.
M. Office,work, and storage areas.
n. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
o. First aid.
P. Security.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 01310-PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
R
PART 1 -GENERAL
s
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including,but not limited to,the following:
1. General Project coordination procedures.
2. Coordination Drawings.
3. Project meetings.
B. See Division 1 Section"Summary of Multiple Contracts for a description of the division of Work
a mon g separate contracts and responsibility for coordination activities not in this Section.
p
C. See Division 1 Section Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general
installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control
points.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure
maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special
procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of
40 attendees at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
04
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310- 1
4
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
' Northampton, MA
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractors Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
F, Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of Values.
3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Submittals Schedule(preliminary if not final).
5. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
6. Copies of building permits.
7. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance
of the Work.
8. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
9. Performance and payment bonds.
10. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of
the Work claimed as substantially complete.
+ ► 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following:
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01290
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290.3
w
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project
Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,
where appropriate.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and
stored, but not yet installed.
6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance.
Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by �.
measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine
quantities.
8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. ..
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values
or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. *�
C. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is the 15th day of each month.
The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the
preceding period and ends 15 days before the date for each progress payment. ..
D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation u.k
Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
.w
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
" Northampton, MA
SECTION 01290-PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare an
process Applications for Payment.
1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven
days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items
for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
C. Architect's project number.
40 d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of the Work.
C. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders(numbers)that affect value.
g. Dollar value.
1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted
to total 100 percent.
4x
ON
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290- 1
R
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA
Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change
R
in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It
also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
■ 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01250
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250-3
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
4. Include an updated Contractors Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the ..
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
.�
Contract Time.
5. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
w
C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709.
1.4 ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the •
difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of
work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing
wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.
1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the
allowance.
2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of
overhead costs and other margins claimed.
3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders
related to unit-cost allowances. "
4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity
survey, measure, or count.
MR
B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance
described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's
handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of the
Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed.
1. Do not include Contractors or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost
amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what
could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.
2. No change to Contractors indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower- �+
priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.
1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owners approval of a Proposal Request,Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of
Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250-2
R Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 01250-CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
! A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them
instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within 14 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost
adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
4" total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data
to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
40 discounts.
C. Include an updated Contractors Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
40 finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
on B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250, 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College ,.
Northampton, MA
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used)
A
PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01140
WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 01140-WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 USE OF PREMISES
■
A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site
beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to areas indicated for each phase.
2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site and use by the public.
3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and
available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use
these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials
and equipment on-site.
B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a clean and tidy condition throughout
construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its
occupants during construction period.
1.2 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction
period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and
facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.
1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of
the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.
2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner
occupancy.
3. Before partial Owner occupancy, in
and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On
occupancy, Owner will provide, operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems
serving occupied portions of building.
4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for
occupied portions of building.
B. Scheduled Events: The Owner has weekend events scheduled throughout the summer.
Coordinate work sequence and clean-up with scheduled events. Retain Women's plumbing
facilities in working order throughout Phase 1.
WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
1.4 FUTURE WORK Northampton, MA
A. Future Contract: Owner will award a separate contract for additional work to be performed at ..
the site after Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful
completion of preparatory work under this Contract. The Contract for future work will include
the following: �*
I. New Elevator Addition.
1.5 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-
division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and ..
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. o„
Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall
be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable
as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted.
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon(:)is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) .R
PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01100 -w
SUMMARY
01100-2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 01100-SUMMARY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Project consists of Renovations to the basement of Helen Hills Hills
Chapel.
1. Project Location: Elm Street, Northampton, MA
2. Owner: Trustees of Smith College,Northampton, MA
B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated June 19, 2001, were prepared for
Project by Kuhn Riddle Architects, 7 North Pleasant Street,Amherst, MA 01002.
C. The Work consists of removal and infill of stair, new toilet facilities and refurbishment to selected
spaces on the lower level.
1. The Work includes demolition and removal of existing concrete masonry partitions,
concrete infill of existing stair opening, cutting trenching and patching existing concrete
slabs on grade, new hollow metal frames with glazing, new wood doors, interior finishes,
toilet specialties, plumbing, fire protection, HVAC and electrical work.
D. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract.
1.2 WORK SEQUENCE
A. The Work shall be conducted in two phases.
1. Phase 1: Remove stair, infill opening, construct new toilet facilities and refurbish office
001.Work of this phase shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy by August
1, 2001 days of the notice to proceed.
2. Phase 2: Remove existing toilet room, demolish partitions and refurbish remaining spaces.
Work for this phase shall be completed by August 24, 2001
1.3 USE OF PREMISES
so A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations, including use
of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited by the
continued occupancy and use of the premises by the Owner and the Owner's right to perform
work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
SUMMARY 01100- 1
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
09680.........Carpet................................................................................................................................... 2 !..�
09912......... Painting (Professional Line Products).................................................................................. 6
DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES
10100.........Visual Display Boards........................................................................................................... 2
10155.........Toilet Compartments........................................................................................................... 2
10801.........Toilet and Bath Accessories................................................................................:................ 3 *�
DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL
15300......... Fire Protection...................................................................................................................... 20 ....
15400......... Plumbing............................................................................................................................... 16
15600......... Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC)......................................................... 33
DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL .A
16100......... Electrical............................................................................................................................... 20
TABLE OF CONTENTS 2
Helen Hills Hills Chapel
Basement Renovations
Smith College
Northampton, MA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division.....Section Title..........................................................................................................................Pages
DIVISION I -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01100.........Summary............................................................................................................................... 2
01140.........Work Restrictions................................................................................................................ 2
01250.........Contract Modification Procedures............................ .......................... 3
. ................................
01290......... Payment Procedures............................................................................................................. 3
01310......... Project Management and Coordination.............................................................................. 4
01320......... Construction Progress Documentation............................................................................... 5
01330.........Submittal Procedures........................................................................................................... 7
01500.........Temporary Facilities and Controls...................................................................................... 7
01700......... Execution Requirements...................................................................................................... 5
01731.........Cutting and Patching........................................................................................................... 4
01732.........Selective Demolition............................................................................................................ 6
01770......... Closeout Procedures............................................................................................................. 6
DIVISION 3-CONCRETE
03300.........Cast-in-place Concrete.......................................................................................................... 4
03542.........Cement-based Underlayment.............................................................................................. 2
DIVISION 5-METALS
05310.........Steel Deck............................................................................................................................. 3
05500.........Metal Fabrications................................................................................................................ 3
DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS
06105.........Miscellaneous Carpentry...................................................................................................... 3
06402.........Interior Architectural Woodwork........................................................................................ 3
DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS
08114.........Custom Steel Doors and Frames......................................................................................... 6
08211......... Flush Wood Doors............................................................................................................... 2
08711......... Door Hardware..................................................................................................................... 4
08800.........Glazing.................................................................................................................................. 3
08814.........Mirrored Glass.................................... ................
. ................................................. ................. 4
DIVISION 9-FINISHES
09215.........Gypsum Veneer Plaster........................................................................................................ 6
09511.........Acoustical Panel Ceilings..................................................................................................... 3
09640.........Wood Flooring..................................................................................................................... 3
09652.........Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings..................................... ............... 4
............................................
09653......... Resilient Wall Base and Accessories.................................................................................... 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1
■
PROJECT MANUAL
HELEN HILLS HILLS CHAPEL
BASEMENT RENOVATIONS
SMITH COLLEGE
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS
,M June 19, 2001
Kuhn Riddle Architects,Inc.
7 North Pleasant Street
Amherst, MA 01002
(413) 259.1630
on fax(413)259-1621
Mechanical and Electrical Engineers
go Lindgren&Sharples
96 Industry Avenue
Springfield,MA 01104
40 (413) 7324336
(413) 731.0786
4"
SN011�3dSNl9NI011118 0�1d30
1002 L Z Nan r
`!I
E
C,I
PROJECT MANUAL
HELEN HILLS HILLS CHAPEL
BASEMENT RENOVATIONS
SMITH COLLEGE
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS
a 3 JFI/�
Sr.,
June 19, 2001
t� OF ��'► F 'yASS
�tRE 0 4
CHARLES o` EVERT Gn �� oQHEAF i�
LINDGREN, t4
u SHARPLES v JR., P.E.
PIO.437 CA
,o ,A
28946 A, No.22425�0�� q RST
�GIST[R� �� 9p GIs VL ;G
r TM Of MASS